2002 Chevrolet Blazer
Owner’s Manual

Litho in U.S.A. ECopyright General Motors Corporation 06/28/01
Part Number C2211 A First Edition All Rights Reserved

i

We support voluntary
technician certification.

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the
name BLAZER are registered trademarks of General
Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes after
that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it
appears in this manual. French Language Manual:
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will Aux propriétaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous
be there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en français chez
If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it votre concessionaire ou au:
so the new owner can use it. Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207

ii

How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning CAUTION:
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and These mean there is something that could hurt
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find you or other people.
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce
the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t,
you or others could be hurt.

You will also find a circle
Safety Warnings and Symbols with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book. symbol means “Don’t,”
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you “Don’t do this” or “Don’t
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore let this happen.”
the warning.

iii

Vehicle Damage Warnings Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this book you will find these notices: Your vehicle may be equipped with components and
labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols,
used on your vehicle, are shown along with the text
NOTICE: describing the operation or information relating to a
specific component, control, message, gage or indicator.
These mean there is something that could damage If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
your vehicle. component, gage or indicator reference the following
topics in the Index:
In the notice area, we tell you about something that can D “Engine Compartment Overview”
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would D “Instrument Panel”
not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid D “Comfort Controls”
the damage. D “Audio Systems”
When you read other manuals, you might see Also see “Warning Lights and Gages” in the Index.
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different
colors or in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle.
They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

iv

These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle:

v

Model Reference
This manual covers these models:

2-Door Utility 4-Door Utility

vi

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also
learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.

1-2 Seats and Seat Controls 1-36 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
1-10 Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone and Small Adults (4-Door Models)
1-15 Here Are Questions Many People Ask About 1-38 Center Rear Passenger Position
Safety Belts -- and the Answers (4-Door Models)
1-16 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1-40 Children
1-16 Driver Position 1-43 Restraint Systems for Children
1-22 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1-55 Older Children
1-23 Right Front Passenger Position 1-58 Safety Belt Extender
1-23 Air Bag System 1-58 Checking Your Restraint Systems
1-31 Center Front Passenger Position (Four-Door 1-59 Replacing Restraint System Parts After
Models with Front Bench Seat) a Crash
1-32 Rear Seat Passengers

1-
1-1

Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the seats -- how to adjust
them, and fold them up and down.
Manual Front Seat

CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when Move the lever located under the front of the manual
the vehicle is not moving. seat up to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it
and release the lever. Try to move the seat with your
body to make sure the seat is locked into place.

1-2

1-3 . Turn the knob counterclockwise to increase lumbar Horizontal Control: Raise or lower the front of the seat support and clockwise to decrease lumbar support. there will be a knob on the outboard side of the driver’s bucket seat. or the rear of the vehicle. Power Seats (If Equipped) Raise or lower the rear of the seat by raising or lowering the rear edge of the control. by raising or lowering the forward edge of the control. Move the seat forward or If your vehicle has this feature. Moving the whole control up or down raises or lowers the whole seat. Vertical Control: Move the reclining front seatback forward or rearward by moving the control toward the front or rear of the vehicle.Manual Lumbar Support (If Equipped) If your vehicle has this feature. there will be a control rearward by moving the whole control toward the front pad on the outboard side of your seat.

Power Lumbar Control (If Equipped) Memory Seat (If Equipped) If your vehicle has this If your vehicle has this feature. A chime will sound to let you know that the position has been stored. A second seating and mirror position can be programmed by repeating the procedure with a second driver and pressing button 2 for three seconds. 1. the control located outboard side of the seat(s). on the outboard side of the driver’s seat looks like this. Press the SET button and then press and hold button 1 (for driver 1) for three seconds. driving position. the memory position will be recalled. To decrease lumbar support. 2. a single chime will sound. it is located on the feature. Use this memory function to save your seat cushion and seatback settings by using the following procedure: Press and hold the front of the control until you have the desired lumbar support. Adjust the driver’s seat to a safe and comfortable press and hold the rear of the control. Each time button 1 or 2 is pressed and released while the vehicle is in PARK (P). 1-4 . Each time a memory button is pressed.

adjust the seat. You will hear a If your vehicle has this chime to confirm programming of the transmitter. To program your keyless entry transmitter. Pressing the UNLOCK button of a keyless entry transmitter will adjust the seat to the corresponding stored memory position. press and release the numbered memory button you just stored. transmission or the parking brake is engaged for a manual transmission. use the seat adjuster switch to for added comfort. Pressing any of the seat adjuster Press the lower part of the switch to turn the heater on switches. 1-5 . start the vehicle while the seat is still adjusting. on high. The seat will move to the set position. You will hear one chime. Press the upper part of the switch to turn the heater memory button twice will cause the seat to stop moving. Adjustment will resume after the ignition is in RUN. if equipped. The transmitter need not be reprogrammed unless it needs to correspond This feature will quickly heat the lower cushion and to the other numbered memory button. feature. lower back of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats If there is a third driver. the SET button or pressing the desired low. You will hear one chime. the controls are located on the outboard When your vehicle is in PARK (P) for an automatic side of the seats. heated seat feature to work on the passenger’s seat. Put the switch in the center position to turn the If you press the numbered button to adjust the seat and heater off. Heated Front Seats (If Equipped) press the UNLOCK button within five seconds of programming the memory button. The passenger’s safety belt must be engaged for the adjustment will pause while the ignition is in START. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to readjust the seat.3.

Reclining Front Seatbacks To adjust a manual seatback. 1-6 . If your vehicle is equipped with the vertical power seat control described earlier. But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving. Pull up on the lever and without pushing on the seatback the seat will go to an upright position. lift the lever on the outboard side of the seat. Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it. it allows the seatback to recline also.

Even if you buckle up. In a crash you could go into it. 1-7 . The belt forces would be there. have the seatback upright. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash. not at your pelvic bones. on others. Head Restraints CAUTION: Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. your safety belts can’t do their job when you’re reclined like this. This could cause serious internal injuries. it will be in front of you. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety Head restraints are fixed on some models and adjustable belt properly. receiving neck or other injuries. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. Slide an adjustable head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your head. The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it won’t be against your body. Instead. The lap belt can’t do its job either.

push the seatback all the way back until the latch catches. the seat. it into the back seat or to access the storage area behind will return to the reclined position. it could move seatback forward.Seatback Latches To return the seatback to the upright position. move the lever CAUTION: located on the side of the seat rearward and pull the If the seatback isn’t locked. If the The front seatbacks fold forward to let people get seatback was reclined before being folded forward. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked. To fold a front seatback forward. forward in a sudden stop or crash. 1-8 . That could cause injury to the person sitting there.

In a sudden stop or crash. Push back on the seatbacks as you pull up on the handles.Easy Entry Seat (2-Door Models) Rear Seats The right front seat of your vehicle makes it easy to get Your vehicle has a folding rear seat which lets you fold in and out of the rear seat. 1. The rear seat release handles are located on the rear of the seatbacks. CAUTION: If an easy entry right front seat isn’t locked. Tilt the right front seatback completely forward and the whole seat will slide forward. the person sitting there could be injured. After you’ve used it. Then move the seat rearward until it locks. see your dealer for service. seat forward again to get out of the rear seat. just lift up the seatbacks and push until they lock in the upright position. To raise the seatbacks. Move the seatback to its original position after someone gets into the rear seat area. be sure to push rearward on an easy entry seat to be sure it is locked. If they haven’t. it can move. Push and pull on the seatbacks to check that the latches have locked in the upright position. 2. 1-9 . The head restraint will automatically Tilt the seatback completely forward and slide the whole fold out of the way when the seatback is folded down. the seatbacks down for more cargo space.

not be if you are buckled up. CAUTION: Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear a safety belt properly. You can hit things inside the To return the head restraints to the upright position. and check that your passengers’ belts the driver’s side rear seat head restraint must be lifted are fastened properly too. the head restraint will hit the spare tire and prevent the seatback from properly latching. vehicle or be ejected from it. Always fasten your On two-door models with an inside mounted spare tire. And it explains the air bag system. If they haven’t. and held upright as the seatback is raised. see your dealer for service. You can be seriously reach behind the seats and pull the head restraint up until injured or killed. Otherwise. Push and pull on the head restraints to check that they have locked in the upright position. In the same crash. It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts. your injuries can be much worse. If you are in a crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt. 1-10 . safety belt. you might it locks into position. Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly.

In a collision.. In many of them. the facts are clear. Be sure away. In most states and Canadian provinces. See “Safety Belt Reminder Light” in the Index. crash. seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to But most crashes are in between. In most crashes buckling up does matter . inside or outside of a vehicle. you don’t know if it will be a bad one. safety belt properly.. You never know if you’ll be in a crash. Here’s why: They work. A few crashes are mild. 1-11 . a lot! Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up. After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles. ride in any area of your vehicle that is not people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk equipped with seats and safety belts. the law says to CAUTION: wear safety belts. and some crashes can be so people riding in these areas are more likely to be serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive. Without belts they could have been badly hurt everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a or killed. If you do have a It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area.

Put someone on it.Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels. Take the simplest vehicle. you go as fast as it goes. 1-12 .

doesn’t stop. Then stop the vehicle. In a real vehicle. The rider The person keeps going until stopped by something.. it could be the windshield . 1-13 ..Get it up to speed.

or the instrument panel ... You stop over more distance. 1-14 . you slow down as the vehicle does. That’s why safety belts make such good sense. or the safety belts! With safety belts. You get more time to stop. and your strongest bones take the forces.

But they are supplemental systems only. Being a good A: You could be -.not instead of them.and the Answers Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an A: You may be an excellent driver. such as bad drivers. but if you’re in an accident -. That’s true not only in frontal collisions. why should I have to Safety belts are for everyone. 1-15 . even if you’re upside down.whether you’re wearing a safety driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your belt or not. And your chance of Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) being conscious during and after an accident. Q: If my vehicle has air bags. than 40 mph (65 km/h). you still have to buckle up to get the most protection. so they work with safety belts -. And the greatest number of serious you can unbuckle and get out. why should I wear safety belts? About Safety Belts -.even one that isn’t your fault -. control. is much greater if injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less you are belted. but especially in side and other collisions. But you can unbuckle a safety belt.Here Are Questions Many People Ask Q: If I’m a good driver. wear safety belts? A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future. so of home. and I never drive far from home.you accident if I’m wearing a safety belt? and your passengers can be hurt. Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air bags.

Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Close and lock the door. 1-16 . see the part of this manual called “Children. Don’t let it get twisted. see “Seats” in the Index. let the belt go back it properly.” Follow those rules for everyone’s protection. If a child will be riding in your vehicle.How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Adults This part is only for people of adult size. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. slightly to unlock it. you’ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has. Then pull the belt across you 1. And there are different rules for smaller children and babies. We’ll start with the driver position. To see how. Here’s how to wear you very quickly. First. more slowly. Lap-Shoulder Belt The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Driver Position This part describes the driver’s restraint system. If this happens. Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. 2. 3.

5. see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. pull down on the buckle The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. the belt would apply force at your abdomen. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. In a crash. 1-17 . This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt isn’t long enough. just touching the thighs. To make the lap part tight.4. this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. or end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt. if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor. If you slid under it.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. 1-18 .Q: What’s wrong with this? CAUTION: You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. which could increase injury. It won’t give nearly as much protection this way. In a crash. The shoulder belt should fit against your body. you would move forward too much.

The belt forces would be there. This could cause serious internal injuries. A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place. 1-19 . the belt would go up over your abdomen. In a crash. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.Q: What’s wrong with this? CAUTION: You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. not at the pelvic bones.

the belt would apply too much force to the ribs. which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen. which would increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also. A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. In a crash. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.Q: What’s wrong with this? CAUTION: You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. 1-20 . your body would move too far forward.

Q: What’s wrong with this? CAUTION: You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. make it straight so it can work properly. A: The belt is twisted across the body. In a crash. 1-21 . or ask your dealer to fix it. you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted.

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone. Before you close the door. they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts. including pregnant women. below the rounding. Like all occupants. 1-22 . just push the button on the buckle. you can damage both the belt and your vehicle. To unlatch the belt. If you slam the door on it. throughout the pregnancy. A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt. and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible. The belt should go back out of the way. be sure the belt is out of the way.

the front of your vehicle hits something. Air way as the driver’s safety belt -. see “Driver Position” earlier have air bags. you will engage the child restraint locking work only in moderate to severe crashes where feature. For pregnant women. They aren’t designed to inflate at all in rollover. Everyone in your vehicle Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of should wear a safety belt properly -.The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the Here are the most important things to know about the air mother. but If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all don’t replace them. rear or Air Bag System low-speed frontal crashes. And. air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations. Wearing your safety belt during a in this section. crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. it’s more bag system: likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. as for anyone. the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly. But these not there’s an air bag for that person. just let the belt go back all the way and start again. bags are designed to work with safety belts.even if you safety belt properly. Air bags are designed to the way. CAUTION: Right Front Passenger Position You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s you aren’t wearing your safety belt -. When a safety belt is worn properly.except for one thing. crashes. for some unrestrained occupants.one air bag for the driver crashes than more forceful air bags have and another air bag for the right front passenger. or in many side This part explains the air bag system. 1-23 . If this happens. air bags may provide less protection in frontal Your vehicle has air bags -. provided in the past.whether or injury from the force of an inflating air bag.

see the part of this manual called “Children. even belt system nor its air bag system is designed for with air bags. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer forward. Neither the vehicle’s safety a crash. it could seriously injure you. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. Young children and infants need the as possible while still maintaining control of protection that a child restraint system can the vehicle. provide. faster than the Anyone who is up against. any blink of an eye. as you would be if you were leaning or killed. To read how. The driver should sit as far back them. If you’re too close to an inflating air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured air bag.” 1-24 . but not for young belts help keep you in position before and during children and infants. CAUTION: CAUTION: Air bags inflate with great force. Safety the best protection for adults. Always wear your safety belt. or very close to.

1-25 . There is an air bag readiness How the Air Bag System Works light on the instrument panel. Where are the air bags? The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index for more information. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. which shows the air bag symbol. The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions.

Don’t put anything between an occupant and an air bag. The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger’s side. The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. CAUTION: If something is between an occupant and an air bag. 1-26 . and don’t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag covering.

The inflator. air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers. especially on rough terrain. The sensing only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed system triggers a release of gas from the inflator. no one can say whether an air the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body. Observe safe driving speeds. the air bag sensing frontal or near-frontal crash. See “Off-Road Driving” in the Index for more tips on off-road driving. If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform. would not help you in many types of collisions. As always. Air bags supplement the protection would not help the occupant. near-frontal collisions. The threshold level steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the can vary. the threshold level will be higher. which “threshold level. Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and including rollovers. such How does an air bag restrain? as a parked car. or in many side impacts because inflation the instrument panel.” If your vehicle goes straight into a inflates the air bag. however. rear impacts and many side impacts. wear your safety belt. how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward near-frontal impacts. so that right front passenger. it can be somewhat above or below this range. 1-27 . air bag and related wall that doesn’t move or deform. Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts. The In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions. provided by safety belts. with specific vehicle design.When should an air bag inflate? What makes an air bag inflate? An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe In an impact of sufficient severity. bag should have inflated simply because of the damage stopping the occupant more gradually. The air bag system is designed to work properly under a and then only in moderate to severe frontal or wide range of conditions. the threshold level is hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the about 9 to 16 mph (14 to 26 km/h). including off-road usage. Air bags distribute the force of In any particular crash. The air bag will inflate system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. But air bags to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. rear even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or impacts. those air bags.

There will be some smoke and dust which records information about the air bag system. you’ll need some new parts for your air bag that some people may not even realize the air bag system. If you don’t get them. that come into contact with you may be warm. too hot to touch. nor does it stop people inflation and driver’s safety belt usage at deployment. but not D Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic module. 1-28 . This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. Air bag The module records information about the readiness inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or from of the system. from leaving the vehicle. when the system commands air bag being able to steer the vehicle. After they After an air bag inflates. If you have breathing problems but can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates. When an air bag inflates. then get fresh air by opening a window or door. so quickly inflate. The service manual for your bag -. it quickly deflates. the air bag system inflated. To avoid this. The parts of the bag vehicle covers the need to replace other parts. everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.will be hot for a short time. there is dust in the air. or the A new system will include air bag modules and instrument panel for the right front passenger’s possibly other parts. coming from vents in the deflated air bags. Improper service can mean that your air bag system won’t work properly. steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag.the won’t be there to help protect you in another crash. Some components of the air bag module -. See your dealer CAUTION: for service. D Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag system.What will you see after an air bag inflates? D Air bags are designed to inflate only once.

around your vehicle. Do not open or or yellow connectors. an air work properly. Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. the bag may not turned off and the battery is disconnected. You may have to replace the air bag can still inflate during improper service. Be sure to follow proper service procedures. NOTICE: CAUTION: If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is right front passenger’s air bag. To purchase a service manual. They are probably part of break the air bag coverings. see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. You don’t want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. 1-29 . the air bag system. Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape right front passenger’s air bag. You bag module in the steering wheel or both the air can be injured if you are close to an air bag when bag module and the instrument panel for the it inflates. and make sure the person Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle performing work for you is qualified to do so. There are parts of the air bag system in several places The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.

you air bags from working properly in a crash. the air bag system may not attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle’s basic work properly if you relocate any of the air bag structure isn’t changed. See “Customer Satisfaction Procedure” in the Index. If you add things that change your vehicle’s from working properly? frame. front end sheet metal or height. If you have any questions about this.Adding Equipment to Your Air Q: Is there anything I might add to the front of the Bag-Equipped Vehicle vehicle that could keep the air bags from working properly? Q: If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to the front of my vehicle. will it keep the air bags A: Yes. they may keep the air bag system from A: As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is working properly. it’s not likely to keep the sensors. 1-30 . The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. Also. should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle. bumper system.

tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt. someone can sit in When you sit in the center front seating position. 1-31 . which has no retractor. you have a lap safety belt. To make the belt longer. the center position.Center Front Passenger Position (4-Door Models with Front Bench Seat) Lap Belt If your vehicle has a front bench seat.

And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts. pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug. 1-32 . Rear Seat Passengers It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts. Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions To make the belt shorter. Buckle. If the belt isn’t long enough.

2. you pull the belt across you very quickly. If it does. see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way. let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Here’s how to wear one properly. let it go back all the way and start again. If the belt is not long enough. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. it will lock. The shoulder belt may lock if belts. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If this happens. 1-33 .Lap-Shoulder Belt 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. Then pull the belt across you more slowly. The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder Don’t let it get twisted.

These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.3. 1-34 . This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. the hips. In a crash. the belt would apply force at your abdomen. pull down on the buckle The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. To make the lap part tight. just touching the thighs. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it.

you would move forward too much. which could increase injury. In a crash. 1-35 . The shoulder belt should fit against your body. just push the button on the buckle. The safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor. CAUTION: You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose.The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash. To unlatch the belt.

the comfort guide better positions the belt away from the neck and head. the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt: 1. To provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for smaller adults. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of the seatback and the interior body to remove the guide from its storage clip. When installed on a shoulder belt. This feature will provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for small adults. 1-36 .Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults (4-Door Models) Four-door models have rear shoulder belt comfort guides.

The elastic 3.2. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. 1-37 . Slide the guide under and past the belt. the slots of the guide. place the guide The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide over the belt. Then. cord must be under the belt. and insert the two edges of the belt into on top.

Buckle. leaving only the loop of the elastic cord exposed. 1-38 . and then slide the guide onto the clip. Center Rear Passenger Position (4-Door Models) 4. squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out of the guides. To remove and store the comfort guides. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder. position and release the safety belt as described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions” earlier in this section. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip. Turn the guide and clip inward and in between the seatback and the interior body.

Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. When you sit in the center rear seating position. release button on the buckle is positioned so you Don’t let it get twisted. you have a lap safety belt which has a retractor. Feed the lap belt into the retractor to tighten it. see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.Lap Belt 4. 1-39 . Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt isn’t long enough. would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if 2. you ever had to. 3. Position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. Make sure the 1. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. During a crash a baby will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it. CAUTION: (Continued) 1-40 . they should have the protection provided by the appropriate restraint. unless there is no other choice. the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle. for everyone. to use safety restraints. A baby doesn’t weigh much -. CAUTION: People should never hold a baby in their arms while riding in a vehicle. In fact. Infants and Young Children Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles.until a crash. Young children should not use the vehicle’s safety belts. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need.

but not for young children and infants. a 12-lb.CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: For example. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer appropriate restraint. in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h). A baby should be secured in an or killed. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. or very close to. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them. (110 kg) force on a person’s air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured arms. any become a 240-lb.5 kg) baby will suddenly Children who are up against. 1-41 . outstanding protection for adults and older children. (5.

so the crash forces can be distributed across the For most basic types of child restraints. In addition.Q: What are the different types of add-on child restraints? CAUTION: A: Add-on child restraints. If it is. Infants always should be secured in a child restraint. an infant in a be used. When purchasing shoulders. there are strongest part of an infant’s body. the back and many different models available. there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs. In a crash. The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint. which are purchased by the vehicle’s owner. a motor vehicle. Newborn infants need complete support. rear-facing seat settles into the restraint. This is consideration not only the child’s weight. the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. height necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is and age but also whether or not the restraint will be weak and its head weighs so much compared with compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will the rest of its body. be sure it is designed to be used in appropriate infant restraints. are available in four basic types. Selection of a particular restraint should take into including support for the head and neck. 1-42 .

as it should. Young children always should be secured in appropriate child restraints. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. the belt would apply force on a body area that’s unprotected by any bony structure. a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle. Restraint Systems for Children CAUTION: The body structure of a young child is quite unlike that of an adult or older child. An infant car bed (A). 1-43 . it may settle up around the child’s abdomen. Instead. is an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface. In a crash. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center of the vehicle. A young child’s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones. for whom the safety belts are designed.

in a crash. 1-44 . with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields. The the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes harness system holds the infant in place and. acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for seating surface against the back of the infant.

which is purchased by the vehicle’s owner. add-on child restraints have used the adult belt system in the vehicle. A harness system has two shoulder straps. To help reduce the chance of injury. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the child’s body. and the add-on child restraint’s harness system holds the child in place within the restraint. Q: How do child restraints work? A: A child restraint system is any device designed for use in a motor vehicle to restrain.or armrest-type shield has straps that are attached to a wide. The five-point booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner. the child also has to be secured within the restraint. A built-in child restraint system is a permanent part of the motor vehicle. A shield may take the place of hip straps. the three-point harness. The vehicle’s belt system secures the add-on child restraint in the vehicle. seat. One system. two hip booster seat can also help a child to see out the window. For many years. has straps that A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. An add-on child restraint system is a portable one. straps and a crotch strap. or position children. and some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A shelf. shelf-like shield that swings up or to the side. 1-45 . Some buckle together at the crotch.

Be sure to properly secure any child child restraint in the front passenger seat. it CAUTION: will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. or both. always if they are not available. be sure to secure the child General Motors. Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. This is because booklet. but before you do. but the child also has to be secured within the back of the rear-facing child restraint would the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury. so in the right front seat. These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle. be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. Wherever you install it. Never put a rear-facing the vehicle. restraints be secured in a rear seat outside position including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat. Here’s why: restraint in your vehicle -. will go. Always When securing an add-on child restraint.When choosing a child restraint. You may seriously injured or killed if the right front find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a passenger’s air bag inflates. be very close to the inflating air bag. on the restraint itself or in a booklet. therefore. and to this You may secure a forward-facing child restraint manual.even when no child is in it. The child restraint instructions are important. If it is. a Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an older around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in child riding in a booster seat. or both. 1-46 . refer to the secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat instructions that come with the restraint which may be outside position. obtain a replacement copy from move the front passenger seat as far back as it the manufacturer. It’s better to secure the child restraint in Where to Put the Restraint a rear seat outside position. recommends that child restraint properly. A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be Then follow the instructions for the restraint.

one can be obtained.” It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed. the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top strap. 1-47 . In Canada. If the child restraint does not have a top strap. some child restraints also have a top strap. Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor points. a top strap must be properly anchored to the vehicle. and that the strap be anchored. If your child restraint has a top strap. In the United States. for many child restraints. don’t use the restraint unless it is anchored properly.Top Strap Some child restraints have a top strap. Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available. For it to work. Others require the top strap always to be anchored. Some top strap-equipped child restraints are designed for use with or without the top strap being anchored. in kit form. Raise the head restraint and route the top strap under it. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint. or “top tether. it should be anchored. If yours requires that the top strap be anchored.

To remove the plugs. See “Rear Convenience System” in the Index for more information. If your vehicle is equipped with the rear convenience system. Don’t use the rear set of Anchor brackets for the rear outside seat positions are tie-down brackets near the liftgate/endgate or the center located on the floor in the cargo area of your vehicle. grasp the edges of the plugs and pull them out. you’ll be ready to secure the child restraint itself. 1-48 . Tighten the top strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions say.Once you have the top strap anchored. there will be plugs covering the anchor brackets. tie-down bracket near the rear seats.

1-49 . Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Make sure the release button is as the instructions say. If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck. Secure the child in the child restraint when and 3. Pick up the latch plate. 1. Buckle the belt. positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. 2. Put the restraint on the seat. put it behind the child restraint.

feed the shoulder belt back into the the retractor to set the lock. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of 5. you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.4. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. To tighten the belt. To remove the child restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child restraint. 6. just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. retractor while you push down on the child restraint. 1-50 .

1-51 . The restraints won’t work properly.Center Seat Positions (4-Door Models) Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position Don’t use child restraints in these positions.

This is because the “Seats” in the Index. portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck. back of the rear-facing child restraint would be 2. Put the restraint on the seat. The child restraint instructions Although a rear seat is a safer place. you can secure a will show you how. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be bag. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. See the earlier part put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. always move the seat as far back as it will go seriously injured or killed if the right front before securing a forward-facing child restraint. and run the lap and shoulder a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. Pick up the latch plate. 1-52 . Secure the child in the child restraint when and CAUTION: as the instructions say. Never You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt.Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. very close to the inflating air bag. Here’s why: about the top strap if the child restraint has one. put it behind the child restraint. 1. See passenger’s air bag inflates. Always secure 3. forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.

Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is 5. safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-53 .4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the the retractor to set the lock.

To remove the child restraint. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint. You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To tighten the belt. just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. 1-54 . 6.

an older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips. Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat. Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle’s safety belts. which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash. In a crash.Older Children Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts? A: If possible. If you have the choice. just touching the top of the thighs. children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up. Older children need to use safety belts properly. or can be thrown out of the vehicle. It should never be worn over the abdomen. a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. 1-55 .

see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index. 1-56 . CAUTION: Never do this. In a crash. if your vehicle has one. If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s face or neck. but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder. Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt. you might want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt. so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide. the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. If the child is sitting in a rear outside position of a four-door model. Here two children are wearing the same belt. but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child’s face or neck? A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle. The belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. A belt must be used by only one person at a time.

in a crash the child might slide under the belt. If the child wears the belt in this way. Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap-shoulder belt. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. just touching the child’s thighs. CAUTION: Never do this. the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. Wherever the child sits. The belt’s force would then be applied right on the child’s abdomen. but the shoulder part is behind the child. 1-57 .

buckles. make sure the safety belt reminder light should use it. have it repaired. and just for the seat in your vehicle that Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a you choose. If you see in to order it. When you go loose or damaged safety belt system parts. latch plates. Look for any other dealer will order you an extender. To wear it.) 1-58 . and have them repaired or replaced. just attach it torn or frayed. take the heaviest coat you will wear. to the regular safety belt. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance. retractors and But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender will doing its job. Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers. your anchorages are working properly. Don’t let someone else use it. get a new one right away. and use it crash. be just for you. It’s free. so the anything that might keep a safety belt system from extender will be long enough for you. you Now and then. and all your belts.Safety Belt Extender Checking Your Restraint Systems If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you.

Then the new belt will be there to help protect you in a collision. 1-59 . nothing may be necessary. you’ll need to replace air bag during a more severe crash. If you ever see a label on the driver’s or the right front passenger’s safety belt that says to replace the belt. But if the belts were stretched. be sure to do so. system parts.Replacing Restraint System Parts If belts are cut or damaged. do you need new belts? may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at the time of the collision. New parts and repairs If you’ve had a crash. After a very minor collision. You would see this label on the belt near the door opening. replace them. Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt After a Crash or seat parts repaired or replaced. as they would be if worn If an air bag inflates. then you need new parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section.

and what to do if you have a problem. shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly -. 2-2 Windows 2-44 Shifting Out of PARK (P) 2-4 Keys (Automatic Transmission Only) 2-6 Door Locks 2-45 Parking Over Things That Burn 2-10 Keyless Entry System (If Equipped) 2-45 Engine Exhaust 2-13 Rear Window 2-46 Running Your Engine While You’re Parked 2-17 Theft (Automatic Transmission) 2-18 Content Theft-Deterrent (If Equipped) 2-47 PasslockR Locking Rear Axle 2-19 2-48 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever 2-20 New Vehicle “Break-In” 2-55 Exterior Lamps 2-20 Ignition Positions 2-58 Interior Lamps 2-23 Starting Your Engine 2-60 Mirrors 2-25 Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped) 2-63 Storage Compartments 2-26 Automatic Transmission Operation 2-75 Accessory Power Outlets 2-30 Manual Transmission Operation 2-77 Sunroof (If Equipped) 2-33 Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) 2-78 HomeLinkR Transmitter (If Equipped) 2-40 Parking Brake 2. Gages and Indicators 2-100 Driver Information Center (DIC) (If Equipped) 2- 2-1 . Section 2 Features and Controls Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle.82 The Instrument Panel--Your 2-41 Shifting Into PARK (P) Information System (Automatic Transmission Only) 2-87 Warning Lights. and information on starting.

Manual Windows Turn the hand crank on each door to raise or lower your manual side door windows. 2-2 .Windows CAUTION: Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous. especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather. Never leave a child alone in a vehicle. A child can be overcome by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke.

Press NORM and the windows will return to normal operation. It is located on the driver’s door armrest. Lockout Switch Four-door vehicles have a lockout feature to prevent passengers from operating the power windows. Press the down arrow on the switch marked ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power AUTO located on the driver’s door briefly to activate (RAP) is active. the controls are located on The driver’s window has an express-down feature that the armrests on each of the side doors. Lightly tap the switch to open the Index. switch. Press LOCK to activate this feature.) The driver’s door has a switch for the the window slightly. The express-down feature can be passengers windows as well. interrupted at any time by pressing the up arrow end of the switch.Power Windows (If Equipped) Express-Down Window If you have power windows. The switches allows you to lower it without holding the window operate the windows when the ignition is in RUN. Press the side of the switch with the down arrow to lower a window. 2-3 . Press the side of the switch with the up arrow to raise the window. (See “Retained Accessory Power” in the express-down feature.

be sure the latch catches. Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children. Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons.Swing-Out Windows (Two-Door Only) Keys If your vehicle has rear swing-out windows. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. When you close the window. 2-4 . A child or others could be badly injured or even killed. unlatch them at the clasps CAUTION: and push out on the glass to open them.

It will fit with either side up. endgate. When a new vehicle is delivered. spare tire lock (two-door vehicles) and door locks. 2-5 . the dealer provides the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key code number. This vehicle has one double-sided key for the ignition.

So. So be sure you have an safety belts properly and lock the doors extra key. If you lose your keys. D Young children who get into unlocked If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle. Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it. When a door is locked. D Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.The key code number tells your dealer or a qualified Door Locks locksmith how to make extra keys.can easily open the doors and fall out of a Your vehicle has a number of new features that moving vehicle. CAUTION: Unlocked doors can be dangerous. Keep this number in a safe place. NOTICE: D Passengers -. 2-6 . A child roadside assistance for help. Your selling dealer should also have this number. whenever you drive. You may even have to damage a crash if the doors aren’t locked. See “Roadside Assistance” can be overcome by extreme heat and can in the Index for more information.especially children -. Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening. suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. But you can have a lot of handle won’t open it. wear your vehicle to get in. contact vehicles may be unable to get out. the can help prevent theft. you’ll be able to have new ones made easily using this number. You increase the trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in your key inside.

D You will see a colored area on the lever when the On four-door models use the manual door lock/unlock door is unlocked. the switches are located on the driver’s and the passenger’s front armrests. If your vehicle has power door locks. slide the manual lever on your door down. press the raised area to the right of the key symbol. if your vehicle has this feature. Remove the ignition key and press LOCK to lock all the doors at once. lever on each rear door to lock or unlock those doors from the rear seating area. D You can use the power lock switch (if equipped) to lock or unlock the doors.There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle: Power Door Locks (If Equipped) D You can use the keyless entry system. slide the lever on the door up. To unlock the doors. D You can use your key to unlock your door from the outside. To manually lock a door from the inside. To manually unlock a door from the inside. 2-7 .

and then the unlock side twice (this is the door locks. Press the lock side of the power lock switch on the door panel once and then the unlock side once. options before entering the programming mode. entry. program your vehicle’s power door locks. you may not be able to utilize this option. 2-8 . D All doors lock/All doors unlock: Press the lock side of the power lock switch on the door panel The following instructions detail how to program your once. This turns off the automatic lock feature. If your vehicle has power door locks. Choose one of the previous programming factory setting). it will be equipped with an auto lock/unlock feature which enables you to For more information. The doors will unlock when the key is removed from the ignition. see your dealer. All the doors will unlock when the shift lever is moved back D All doors lock/Only the driver’s door unlocks: into PARK (P).Programmable Automatic Door Locks D No doors lock/None of the doors unlock: Press the (If Equipped) lock side of the power lock switch on the door panel twice. all doors will lock when your vehicle is not equipped with remote keyless the vehicle speed is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h). D All doors lock/None of the doors unlock: Press the lock side of the power lock switch on the door panel once. If On a manual transmission. and then the unlock side three times. If your vehicle has an automatic transmission it will be The following is a list of the available programmed to have all the doors lock automatically programming options: when the shift lever is moved out of PARK (P).

located on the inside edge 2. If you want to open a rear door when a security lock is on. you can lock the rear doors so they 1. If you exceed the 30 second limit. mode. with Step 1. Repeat these steps on the opposite rear door. do lever. release the turn signal/multifunction To use the security locks. the key in OFF. signal/multifunction lever all the way toward you The security lock lever is and hold it while you perform the next step. unlock the door and open the door from the outside. the locks will automatically lock and unlock to indicate you have left the program mode.. repeat the procedure beginning 1. the auto lock/unlock setting will not 4. Begin with the ignition in OFF. 3. you will hear the lock switch the following: lock and unlock.To enter the program mode you need to do the Rear Door Security Lock (If Equipped) following: With this feature. Then. Then pull the turn may not be opened from the inside by passengers. Turn your key to RUN and OFF twice. slide the lever down to the unlock symbol to automatically lock and unlock to indicate you are disengage the lock. 2-9 . You will have 30 seconds to begin programming. If this occurs. Close the door. If the security locks are engaged. If the lock/unlock switches are not pressed while in the programming 3. the rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened form the inside. with of each rear door. Select one of the previous four programming options and follow the instructions. be modified. You are now ready to program the automatic door locks. Slide the lever up to the lock symbol to engage the time by turning the ignition to RUN (the locks will lock or. Once you do this. leaving the program mode). You can exit the program mode any 2. Open one of the rear doors.

take your key. all the doors will lock and Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency the driver’s door will unlock.Lockout Prevention Keyless Entry System (If Equipped) This feature stops the power door locks from locking If your vehicle has this feature. you can lock and unlock when the keys are in the ignition and a door is open. If you are leaving the vehicle. Then get out and (1) this device may not cause harmful interference. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference. and the key is in the ignition. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. and (2) this device must accept any interference received. including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. and close the door. 2-10 . subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. (2) this device must accept any interference received. Leaving Your Vehicle This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. open your Operation is subject to the following two conditions: door and set the locks from inside. to your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) protect you from locking your key in the vehicle. away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open with your vehicle. including interference that may cause undesired operation.

the resynchronization is necessary. REAR: When you press the REAR button twice within three seconds to release the rear liftglass.Changes or modifications to this system by other than an Operation authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. try this: the parking lamps will flash and the interior D Check the distance. see your dealer or a LOCK: Press LOCK to lock all the doors. D Check the location. UNLOCK: When you At times you may notice a decrease in range. Take a few steps to the left or right. Press LOCK qualified technician for service. 2-11 . You may be too far from your lamps will go on. and try again. the parking lamps will flash and the interior lamps will go on. This is press UNLOCK. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. the transmission must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). D If you’re still having trouble. you must engage the parking brake. hold the transmitter higher. If your vehicle has an automatic transmission. If the driver’s door will transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer unlock automatically. again within three seconds and the horn will chirp. If your vehicle has a manual transmission. vehicle. D Check to determine if battery replacement or If you press UNLOCK again within three seconds. See the instructions remaining doors will unlock. flash and the interior lamps will go on. You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather. the parking lamps will that follow. to your vehicle for the transmitter to work. the normal for any remote keyless entry system.

Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters matched to it. 2-12 . work at the normal range in any location. Static from your body dealer. Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle it’s probably time to change the battery. NOTICE: If a transmitter is lost or stolen. Remember to bring any When replacing the battery. This can be turned off by pressing the panic button You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t again. the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works. the horn will sound and the entry transmitter should last about two years. any remaining transmitters transferred to these surfaces may damage the must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the transmitter. When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle. or starting the vehicle. new transmitter.Panic Alarm Button Battery Replacement When the panic button with the horn symbol on the key Under normal use. headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to 30 seconds. use care not to touch remaining transmitters with you when you go to your any of the circuitry. a replacement can be purchased through your dealer. Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. the battery in your remote keyless transmitter is pressed. waiting for 30 seconds.

4. You can’t see or smell CO. That will force outside air into your vehicle. 2-13 . positive (+) side up. CR2032 or equivalent battery. Remove the bottom by twisting the object. on VENT and OUTSIDE AIR. Check the operation of the transmitter. Insert an object like a thin coin in the slot between D Turn the fan on your heating or cooling the covers of the transmitter housing near the key system to its highest speed with the setting ring hole. D If you have air outlets on or under the 3. 1. instrument panel. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter do Rear Window the following: CAUTION: It can be dangerous to drive with the rear window or endgate open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle. Remove and replace the battery with a three-volt “Comfort Controls” in the Index. Align the covers and snap them together. open them all the way. See 2. If you must drive with the rear window or endgate open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the rear window or endgate: D Make sure all other windows are shut. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.

2-14 . If your vehicle is equipped with the keyless entry system. You may also use the keyless entry system. the key into the lock and turn it counterclockwise to unlock the glass. or the power door locks (if equipped). press the button To open a manual lock system from the outside. insert the key into the lock button and turn it counterclockwise. All the doors will then unlock. your vehicle does not have a lock on the endgate. To open a power lock system from the outside. It is equipped with a push-button to release the glass.Endgate Release When the doors are unlocked. insert to open the glass.

allows you to release the rear glass from inside the vehicle. Reach inside the endgate Remote Rear Glass Release to lift the handle and open the endgate. release to work. To lock a power lock system from the outside. your shift door is unlocked. you must apply your key into the lock button and turn clockwise. insert the If you have a manual transmission. located to the right of the steering wheel on the instrument panel. open the endgate glass. The REAR HATCH button. All doors parking brake or have the ignition off before you can will lock. The endgate glass will not release if lever must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) for the the vehicle is in gear. The endgate can be opened without a key if the driver’s If your vehicle has an automatic transmission. 2-15 .

you must move the carrier arm out of the way to open the glass. Pry the release lever toward the passenger’s side until the glass latch pops open. 3. Reattach the carpet securely. 2.Emergency Release for Opening Endgate Endgate-Mounted Spare (If Equipped) 1. 1. 2. Squeeze the release handle to free the carrier arm. Swing the carrier arm away from the endgate. carrier. 2-16 . You may need to give it a slight tug. Latch the carrier arm by swinging it toward the endgate. 4. Use a thin object to reach through the Here’s how to move the arm: access holes in both the trim panel and the hardware cover. Peel back or slit the carpet locally to expose the If your vehicle has an endgate-mounted spare tire access hole in the trim panel. 3.

Park in a lighted spot. remember to lock the doors. Your steering wheel will be locked. and so will your take the transmitter with you. D Put your valuables in a storage area. it impossible to steal. close all windows and lock your Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent vehicle. it’s an take your keys. But what if you have to leave your easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -. it’s still best to lock it up and If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside. However. we know that nothing we put on it can make Put them in a storage area. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight. If you have an automatic transmission.so ignition key? What if you have to leave something don’t do it. taking your key out also locks your transmission. like your you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key glove box. D If your vehicle has a remote keyless entry system. valuable in your vehicle? When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door. Always do this. especially in some cities. Also D Lock all the doors except the driver’s. or take them with you. 2-17 . Parking Lots Even if you park in a lot where someone will be Key in the Ignition watching your vehicle. there are ways you can help. ignition. from the ignition and take it with you. features.Theft Parking at Night Vehicle theft is big business.

Open the door. light should come on and stay on. If you set off the alarm by accident. armed until the SECURITY light goes off. The SECURITY way will set off the alarm. The SECURITY light should go off with the key. Theft-Deterrent alarm system. Your vehicle’s (If Equipped) headlamps will flash and the horn will sound for Your vehicle may be equipped with a Content 110 seconds. Close all doors. the alarm will go off. 2-18 . the you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door SECURITY light will lock. You can also turn off the alarm by pressing after approximately 30 seconds. Remember. the vehicle should be locked with the door key after the doors are closed. You should also remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off. Unlocking a door any other remote keyless entry transmitter. Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident: This light reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent D If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent system. Here’s how to do it: system. unlock any door 3. then will turn off to save the battery power. or use the remote 2. The alarm won’t stop if you try to unlock a door any other way. D Always unlock a door with a key. 1. It activates only if you use a power door lock flash as you open the door switch with the door open. the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if With this system. or with the remote keyless (if your ignition is off).Content Theft-Deterrent If a door is opened without the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or the keyless entry transmitter. entry transmitter. The alarm is not UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter.

Activate the system by locking the doors with the enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a power door lock switch while the door is open. However. with the manual door lock and open the door. see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index. your Passlock system is not authorized service center. If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock with the remote keyless entry transmitter. or valid key. check to see if the horn If the engine does not start after three tries. See your dealer for service. call the GM Roadside Assistance Center. to RUN. To replace the fuse. close the door and wait for the go off approximately five seconds after the key is turned SECURITY light to go out. before trying to restart the engine. You may also want to check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index). Get out of the vehicle. 2-19 . and open the driver’s door. Passlock 2. From inside the vehicle. Remember to release If the alarm does not sound when it should but the the key from START as soon as the engine starts. Passlock is a passive theft-deterrent system. fuel is disabled. the SECURITY light will 3. unlock the door If the engine stalls and the SECURITY light flashes. The horn fuse may be blown. the vehicle works. 4. If the engine is running and the SECURITY message If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’s headlamps comes on. In an emergency. Then reach in through the window. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index. vehicle’s headlamps flash. lower the driver’s window theft-deterrent system.Testing the Alarm PasslockR The alarm can be tested by following these steps: Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock 1. needs service. working properly and must be serviced by your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this time. the vehicle should be serviced by an the engine off. cylinder is tampered with. you will be able to restart the engine if you turn do not flash. This wait about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing should set off the alarm. During normal operation.

Don’t make full-throttle starts. Follow this breaking-in guideline every A (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use things time you get new brake linings. D Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322 km) or so. you can turn it to five different positions. Push in the key and turn it toward you.for the first 500 miles (805 km). See engine is off. just as it was before you inserted the key. information.” But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines: D Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for the first 500 miles (805 km). NOTICE: Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate “break-in. “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for more Your steering wheel will remain locked.New Vehicle “Break-In” Ignition Positions With the key in the ignition. 2-20 . D Don’t drive at any one speed -. like the radio and the windshield wipers when the D Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.fast or slow -. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. During this time your new brake linings aren’t yet broken in.

turning the key ignition switch. Don’t press the key release button while your vehicle in motion while the engine is off (for the vehicle is moving. B (LOCK): This position locks your ignition. then turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the CAUTION: key hard. If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t turn it. Use OFF if you must have to OFF. E (START): This position starts your engine. If you need to turn the engine C (OFF): This position lets you turn off the engine but off while the vehicle is moving. Turn the key only with your hand. D (RUN): This is the position for driving. 2-21 . is it all the way in? If it is. if so. then your to LOCK will lock the steering column and result vehicle needs service. if your vehicle is being towed). position for long periods of time. It’s a theft-deterrent feature. steering NOTICE: wheel and transmission. Using a tool to force it could break the key or the On manual transmission vehicles. This could cause a collision. turn the key only still turn the steering wheel. You will only be able to remove your key when the Don’t operate accessories in the ACCESSORY ignition is turned to LOCK. be sure you are using the correct key. in a loss of ability to steer the vehicle. If none of this works. example. Prolonged operation of accessories in the ACCESSORY NOTICE: position could drain your battery and prevent you from starting your vehicle.

2-22 . Once the key is turned from RUN to OFF. these features will continue to work for up to 20 minutes or until a door is opened. Pull the key straight out.Key Release Button Retained Accessory Power (RAP) The key cannot be removed Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory from the ignition of manual Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain features transmission vehicles unless of your vehicle to continue to work for up to 20 minutes the key release button after the ignition key is turned to OFF. power windows. Your radio. To remove the key on manual transmission vehicles. sunroof and overhead console will work when the ignition key is in RUN or ACCESSORY. is used. turn the key to OFF. turn the key to LOCK and pull it straight out. On automatic transmission vehicles. Then turn the key to LOCK while pressing the key release button down at the same time.

safety feature. while you start the engine. 2-23 . And the excessive heat can moving. about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter. let go of the key and let up on the accelerator pedal. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and accelerator pedal all the way to the floor. let Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). The idle speed will go down as your Your engine won’t start in any other position -. When the engine pedal is not all the way down -. starts. At 15 seconds. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch hold the ignition key in START. Shift to PARK (P) only when your starter will automatically be disengaged. turn the Automatic Transmission ignition key to START. If you do. With your foot off the accelerator pedal. you could damage the damage your starter motor. When the engine starts. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds. the transmission. Manual Transmission The gear selector should be in neutral and the parking 2.that’s a engine gets warm. go of the key. use NEUTRAL (N) only. To restart when you’re already moving. NOTICE: NOTICE: Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle is drained much sooner.that’s a safety feature. Wait about 15 seconds between each try. push the brake engaged.Starting Your Engine Starting Your V6 Engine 1. Wait vehicle is stopped.

START for about three seconds. let go of the key. the engine operates. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again. 2-24 . If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then parts or accessories. When the engine starts. do the same thing. If you add electrical 2. electronics in your vehicle. do this: NOTICE: 1. turn the ignition key to START and hold it there up to Your engine is designed to work with the 15 seconds. If you don’t. Before adding electrical Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the equipment. With your foot off the accelerator pedal. let go of the key and accelerator. it could be flooded with too much gasoline. but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. you could change the way stops). When the engine starts. floor and holding it there as you hold the key in your engine might not perform properly. check with your dealer.When starting your engine in very cold weather (below 0_F or -18_C).

grounded 110-volt AC outlet. the wrong four hours prior to starting your vehicle. from moving engine parts. Usually. If the cord won’t reach. at least 15 amps. At temperatures kind of extension cord could overheat and cause above 32_F (0_C). the engine CAUTION: coolant heater can help. Also. You could be seriously injured. If you don’t. Turn off the engine. Instead of trying to list everything here. behind the underhood fuse block. 0_F (-18_C) or colder. it could be damaged. How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the outside temperature. be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away 3. 2-25 . Before starting the engine. You’ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up. use of the coolant heater is a fire. and some other things. 2. we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your vehicle. Plug it into a normal. Plug the not required. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. cord into a properly grounded three-prong To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 110-volt AC outlet. Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of could cause an electrical shock. The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area. use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for 1. the kind of oil you have. The cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine compartment. 4.Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped) In very cold weather.

There are several different positions for your shift lever. there will be a small current drain on your battery which could discharge your battery over a period of time. This display must be powered anytime the shift lever is capable of being moved out of PARK (P). If you need to leave your key in the ignition in OFF for an extended period. Your automatic transmission may have a shift lever located on the console between the seats or on the steering column. 2-26 .Automatic Transmission Operation If your vehicle is equipped with a column shift lever. but not locked. it is recommended that you disconnect the battery cable from the battery to prevent discharging your battery. This means that if your key is in OFF. it features an electronic shift position indicator within the instrument panel cluster.

your vehicle will be maintain brake application. If you level ground.not in NEUTRAL. see “Towing a Trailer” shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the in the Index. even when you’re on fairly PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. the vehicle can move suddenly.push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) (press the button in on the console shift lever) as you If you have four-wheel drive. So.even if your shift lever is in into the gear you wish. transmission shift lock control system. To be sure your apply your regular brakes before you can shift from vehicle won’t move. lever -. See “Shifting Out of PARK (P)” PARK (P) -. See “Four-Wheel CAUTION: Drive (Automatic Transfer Case)” in the Index.PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the If you’re pulling a trailer. parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. ease pressure on the shift move the shift lever to PARK (P).if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before running unless you have to. If you have left the starting the engine. in the Index. be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear -. always set your parking brake and cannot shift out of PARK (P). CAUTION: (Continued) 2-27 . Your vehicle has an automatic engine running. You have to fully You or others could be injured. Then move the shift lever free to roll -. It’s the best position to use when you start your engine because CAUTION: (Continued) your vehicle can’t move easily.

Damage to your transmission caused by shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty. see “Stuck In Sand. Unless your foot is firmly on the transmission. your vehicle could move very your vehicle is stopped. To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing. Ice or Snow” in the Index. 2-28 .REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. To restart when you’re already NOTICE: moving. use NEUTRAL (N) only. CAUTION: NOTICE: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is moving forward could damage your dangerous. You could lose control and hit people or objects. rapidly. Mud. NEUTRAL (N): In this position. ice or sand without damaging your transmission. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after brake pedal. your engine doesn’t connect with the wheels.

off-road driving. This could overheat and damage the transmission. If the shift accelerator pedal about halfway down. SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads. lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward.DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. carrying a heavy load. accelerator all the way down. NOTICE: DRIVE (D) should not be used when towing a trailer. Select THIRD (3) when operating the This might happen if you were stuck in very deep vehicle under any of these conditions. driving on steep hills or for If your rear wheels can’t turn. 2-29 . sand or mud or were up against a solid object. pedal. don’t try to drive. THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal You could damage your transmission. You should use THIRD (3) your vehicle there with only the accelerator when towing a trailer. or in deep snow or mud. carrying a heavy load. Use your brakes or shift into SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). the transmission won’t shift into first gear until D Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more. push your it on very steep hills. driving on steep hills or winding roads or for off-road driving. If you FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power need more power for passing. You can use on a hill. driving. but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on. push the the vehicle is going slowly enough. You can also use SECOND (2) for starting your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces. don’t hold economy than DRIVE (D). and you’re: but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). because it offers more power and lower fuel Also. if you stop when going uphill. You can use D Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h). You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.

you can use this feature to more effectively tow or haul a heavy load. To go back to normal operation. Here’s how to operate your manual transmission: To select the tow/haul mode. The indicator light on the instrument panel You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less cluster will go out. This button This is your shift pattern. If you’ve come to a complete for more information. press the you press the accelerator pedal. button again. put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. 2-30 . Press the clutch pedal back down. will be located on the floor console. If your vehicle is equipped with the tow/haul selector button. The FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into Tow/Haul light on the instrument panel cluster will FIRST (1). Then shift into FIRST (1). slowly let up on the clutch pedal as come on. See “Tow/Haul Mode” in the Index than 20 mph (30 km/h). stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (1). press the button. Then.Tow/Haul Selector Button (If Equipped) Manual Transmission Operation Your vehicle may be 5-Speed equipped with a tow/haul selector button.

Then. Use REVERSE (R). to NEUTRAL. along with the parking brake. Slowly let up on the NOTICE: clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is To stop. Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your the brake pedal. press the clutch pedal. 4 and 5): Shift into THIRD (3). Just before the vehicle stops. then shift into REVERSE (R). FOURTH AND FIFTH (3.SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on REVERSE (R): To back up. NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle your engine. for parking your vehicle. Then slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal. and shift transmission. THIRD. 2-31 . wait the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2). about six seconds. FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same way you do for SECOND (2). accelerator pedal. let up on the accelerator pedal and press stopped. press vehicle is moving could damage your the clutch pedal and the brake pedal.

accelerate slowly and with a manual transmission. For the best fuel economy. it is normal for the light to go on and off if you quickly change the position of the If you have a manual accelerator. Ignore the SHIFT light when you downshift. Don’t shift down more than gear for best fuel economy. road and traffic conditions let If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and is equipped you. You could injure This light will show you when to shift to the next higher yourself or others. when the transfer case is in 4LO. CAUTION: If you skip a gear when you downshift. When this light comes on. you could lose control of your vehicle. one gear at a time when you downshift. you have a SHIFT light on your instrument panel cluster. transmission. 2-32 .Shift Light (If Equipped) While you accelerate. you can shift to the next higher gear if weather. disregard the SHIFT light shift when the light comes on.

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) Electronic Transfer Case (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your If your four-wheel-drive
engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra vehicle has the electronic
traction. To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel transfer case, the transfer
drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read the case buttons are to the right
part that follows before using four-wheel drive. You of the steering wheel on the
should use two-wheel high (2HI) for most normal instrument panel.
driving conditions.

NOTICE:
Driving in the 4HI or 4LO positions for a long
time on dry or wet pavement could shorten the
life of your vehicle’s drivetrain. Use these buttons to shift into and out of four-wheel
drive. You can choose among three driving settings:
2HI: This setting is for driving in most street and
highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive. When this lamp is lit, it is about
one-half as bright as the others.
4HI: This setting engages your front axle to help
drive your vehicle. Use 4HI when you need extra
traction, such as on snowy or icy roads, or in most
off-road situations.

2-33

4LO: This setting also engages your front axle to give Shifting from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO
you extra traction. You may never need 4LO. It sends To shift from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO, the vehicle must be
the maximum power to all four wheels. You might stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the
choose 4LO if you were driving off-road in sand, mud transmission in NEUTRAL (N) in vehicles equipped
or deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills. with an automatic transmission or the clutch pedal
Indicator lights in the buttons show you which setting engaged in vehicles equipped with a manual
you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly transmission. The preferred method for shifting into
when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to
the lights do not come on, you should take your vehicle 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4LO button. You must
in for service. An indicator light will flash while wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and
shifting. It will remain illuminated when the shift is remain illuminated before shifting your transmission
completed. into gear or releasing the clutch pedal.
If the 4LO button is pressed when your vehicle is in gear
Shifting from 2HI to 4HI and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash for
Press and release the 4HI button. This can be done at 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your vehicle is
any speed, and the front axle will lock automatically. moving slower than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the transmission
is in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch pedal engaged.
Shifting from 4HI to 2HI On automatic transmission equipped vehicles, if your
Press and release the 2HI button. This can be done at transfer case does not shift into 4LO, your transmission
any speed, and the front axle will unlock automatically. indicator switch may require adjustment. With your
transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and release the
4LO button. While the 4LO indicator light is flashing,
shift your transmission into PARK (P). Wait until the
4LO indicator light remains illuminated before shifting
your transmission into gear. This will get you into 4LO,
but you should take your vehicle in for service to restore
normal operation.
2-34

Shifting from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI On automatic transmission equipped vehicles, if your
To shift from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI, your vehicle must be transfer case does not shift into 4HI, your transmission
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the indicator switch may require adjustment. With your
transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch pedal transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and release the
engaged. The preferred method for shifting out of 4LO 4HI button. While the 4HI indicator light is flashing,
is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to shift your transmission into PARK (P). Wait until the
3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4HI button. You must 4HI indicator light remains illuminated before shifting
wait for the 4HI indicator light to stop flashing and your transmission into gear. This will get you into 4HI,
remain illuminated before shifting your transmission but you should take your vehicle in for service to restore
into gear or releasing the clutch pedal. normal operation.

If the 4HI button is pressed when your vehicle is in
gear and/or moving, the 4HI indicator light will flash
for 30 seconds but not complete the shift unless the
vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and
the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch
pedal engaged.

2-35

Automatic Transfer Case (If Equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped
with the automatic transfer
case, the transfer case
buttons are located to the
right of the steering wheel
on the instrument panel.

Use these buttons to shift into and out of four-wheel 2HI: This setting is used for driving in most street and
drive. You can choose among four driving settings: highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive. This setting also provides the best fuel
economy.
AUTO 4WD: This setting is ideal for use when road
conditions are variable. When driving your vehicle in
AUTO 4WD, the front axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s
power is sent only to the rear wheels. When the vehicle
senses a loss of traction, the system will automatically
engage four-wheel drive. Driving in this mode results in
slightly lower fuel economy than 2HI.

2-36

4HI: Use 4HI when you need extra traction, such as NEUTRAL: Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
on snowy or icy roads or in most off-road situations. NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See
This setting also engages your front axle to help drive “Recreational Vehicle Towing” or “Towing Your
your vehicle. Vehicle” in the Index for more information.
4LO: This setting also engages your front axle and Indicator lights in the buttons show which setting you
delivers extra torque. You may never need 4LO. It sends are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when
maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose you turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the
4LO if you are driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud, lights do not come on, you should take your vehicle to
deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills. your dealer for service. An indicator light will flash
while shifting the transfer case. It will remain
illuminated when the shift is complete. If for some
CAUTION: reason the transfer case cannot make a requested shift, it
will return to the last chosen setting.
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can If the SERVICE 4WD light stays on, you should take
cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission your vehicle to your dealer for service. See “Service
is in PARK (P), or if you have a manual 4WD” in the Index for further information.
transmission, even if you are in gear. You or Shifting to 4HI or AUTO 4WD
someone else could be seriously injured. Be sure
to set the parking brake before shifting the Press and release the 4HI or AUTO 4WD button. This
transfer case to NEUTRAL. See “Parking Brake” can be done at any speed, and the indicator light will
flash while shifting. It will remain illuminated when the
in the Index.
shift is complete.

2-37

Shifting to 2HI Shifting Out of 4LO
Press and release the 2HI button. This can be done at To shift from 4LO to 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI, your
any speed. vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph
(4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N), or
Shifting to 4LO with the clutch pedal pressed for vehicles with manual
To shift to 4LO, the vehicle’s engine must be running transmission, and the engine running. The preferred
and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than method for shifting out of 4LO is to have your vehicle
3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL moving 1 or 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release
(N) or with the clutch pedal pressed for vehicles with the 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI button. You must wait for
manual transmission. The preferred method for shifting the 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI indicator light to stop
into 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 or 2 mph flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4LO button. transmission into gear.
You must wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop If the 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI button is pressed when
flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4HI, AUTO
transmission into gear. 4WD or 2HI indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but
If the 4LO button is pressed when your vehicle is in gear will not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving
and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash for less than 3mph (4.8 km/h) with the transmission in
30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your NEUTRAL (N) or with the clutch pedal pressed for
vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the vehicles with manual transmission.
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) or with the clutch
pedal pressed for vehicles with manual transmission.
After 30 seconds, the transfer case will return to the
setting last chosen.

2-38

Shifting to NEUTRAL Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL, first make sure To shift out of NEUTRAL:
the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll: 1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular
1. Set the parking brake. brake pedal.
2. Start the vehicle. 2. Start the vehicle with the transmission in PARK (P)
3. Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle. or FIRST (1) for vehicles with manual transmission.

4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or have 3. Press the button for the desired transfer case position
the clutch pedal pressed for vehicles with manual (2HI, 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 4LO).
transmission. 4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or press the
5. Shift the transfer case to 2HI. clutch pedal for vehicles with manual transmission.

6. Simultaneously press and hold the 2HI and 4LO 5. Shift the transmission lever to the desired position.
buttons for 10 seconds. The NEUTRAL light will After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL,
come on when the transfer case shift to NEUTRAL the NEUTRAL light will go out.
is complete. 6. A re-engagement sound is normal when shifting out
7. Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for of NEUTRAL.
one second, then shift the transmission to
DRIVE (D) for one second or FIRST (1) for
vehicles with manual transmission.
8. Turn the ignition to OFF.
9. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P) or
FIRST (1) for vehicles with manual transmission.
10. Release the parking brake prior to towing.

2-39

Parking Brake
The parking brake is located near the bottom of the
instrument panel on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake
pedal with your left foot. If the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light will come on.

NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to
replace them, and you could also damage other If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill,
parts of your vehicle. see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the BRAKE RELEASE lever fully.
It is located on the bottom of the driver’s side of the
instrument panel.

2-40

Shifting Into PARK (P) Column Shift Lever
(Automatic Transmission Only) 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that
follow. With four-wheel drive, your vehicle will
be free to roll -- even if your shift lever is in
PARK (P) -- if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL. So be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear -- not in NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel
Drive (Automatic Transfer Case)” in the Index.
Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P) with D Pull the lever toward you.
the parking brake firmly set. If you’re pulling a
trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

2-41

Console Shift Lever
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position
like this:

D Move the lever up as far as it will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you
can leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle is
in PARK (P). D Hold in the button on the lever.
D Push the lever all the way toward the front of
the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you
can leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle is
in PARK (P).
2-42

Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
Running (Automatic Transmission Only) running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the
CAUTION: shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you (or pressing the button on a console shift
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the lever). If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t
engine running. Your vehicle could move fully locked into PARK (P).
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. If you have Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
four-wheel drive, your vehicle will be free to roll If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
-- even if your shift lever is in PARK (P) -- if transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
your transfer case is in NEUTRAL. So be sure vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel Drive (Automatic shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
Transfer Case)” in the Index. And, if you leave To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
the vehicle with the engine running, it could
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
overheat and even catch fire. You or others could PARK (P)” in the Index.
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine running unless you have to. When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

2-43

remove the key and release If you cannot shift out of PARK (P). 2-44 . the shift lever--push the shift lever all the way into If you are parking on a hill. move the shift lever into the gear you want. see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the Once the shift lever has been placed into REVERSE (R) ignition is in RUN. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as possible. ignition key to OFF. 5. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4. try this: 1. and firmly apply the parking brake. See “Automatic Transmission with the clutch pedal pressed in. move the shift lever control system. Turn the key to OFF. you can turn the Operation” in the Index. If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift out of PARK (P). or if your vehicle is pulling PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. ease pressure on the clutch. You have to fully apply the regular into REVERSE (R). 3. 4. You must press the shift lever button on the shift lever. Then a trailer.Shifting Out of PARK (P) Parking Your Vehicle (Manual (Automatic Transmission Only) Transmission Models Only) Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock Before you get out of your vehicle. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N). 2. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you want.

CAUTION: If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle: Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust D Drive it only with all the windows down to parts under your vehicle and ignite. and over papers. 2-45 . Don’t park blow out any CO. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO). It can cause unconsciousness and death.Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust CAUTION: Engine exhaust can kill. can burn. D Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris. which you can’t see or smell. D Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly. D Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. dry grass or other things that D Have your vehicle fixed immediately. You might have exhaust coming in if: D Your exhaust system sounds strange or different. leaves. D Your vehicle was damaged in a collision. D Repairs weren’t done correctly.

even if your shift lever is in this can happen is a garage. See “Blizzard” in the Index. Your vehicle can roll. drive gear -. CAUTION: Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. Exhaust -. Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t move. See “Four-Wheel Drive (Automatic Transfer Case)” in the Index. Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. One place be free to roll -. here are some things to know.can come in easily. So be sure the transfer case is in a garage with the engine running.if your transfer case is in CO -. To be sure your your vehicle. the vehicle can move suddenly. If you’re pulling a trailer.” level ground.Running Your Engine While You’re Parked (Automatic Transmission) CAUTION: It’s better not to park with the engine running. See the earlier Caution under vehicle won’t move. even when you’re on fairly “Engine Exhaust. always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P). see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. 2-46 .not in NEUTRAL. idling in a closed-in place can let deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even If you have four-wheel drive. If you’ve left the Idling the engine with the climate control engine running. your vehicle will if the fan is at the highest setting.with PARK (P) -. NEVER park in a NEUTRAL. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. But if you ever have to. Also. It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. system off could allow dangerous exhaust into You or others could be injured.

hold the steering wheel and pull the tilt lever toward you.Locking Rear Axle Tilt Wheel (If Equipped) If your vehicle has this feature. To tilt. Move the wheel to a comfortable level. The tilt lever is located on the driver’s side of the Horn steering column. can raise it to the highest level to allow more room for but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the the driver to enter and exit the vehicle. mud. this feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle. sand before you drive. To sound the horn. 2-47 . It works like a standard axle most of the time. then release the tilt lever to lock the wheel in place. Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. under the turn signal lever. your locking rear axle A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel can give you additional traction on snow. ice. you or gravel. If you have the tilt steering wheel. other does. press the horn symbol on the steering wheel pad.

D Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer As you signal a turn or a lane change. D Windshield Wipers D Windshield Washer D Cruise Control (If Equipped) 2-48 . These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change. The lever will return by D Turn and Lane Change Signals itself when you release it. just raise or lower the lever includes the following: until the arrow starts to flash. The lever on the left side of the steering column To signal a lane change. the lever will return automatically. When the turn is finished. Hold it there until you complete your lane change. An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change.Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever Turn and Lane-Change Signals The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two downward (for left) positions. a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal. To signal a turn. move the lever all the way up or down. if the arrows flash D Flash-to-Pass Feature more quickly than normal.

but not signal. a chime will sound at each flash of the turn To use it. To turn off the chime. the signal indicator will flash even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. this indicator light on signal a turn. your high-beam headlamps will turn on. check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit the instrument panel cluster Breakers” in the Index) and for burned-out bulbs. To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you to low. a different turn signal flasher is used. to the off position. replace it to help avoid an When the high beams are accident. If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer low beam. Check the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make sure they Flash-to-Pass Feature are working. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you on.If a bulb is burned out. If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for the trailer lamps. Then release it. move the turn signal lever so far that you hear a click. 2-49 . pull the multifunction lever all the way toward and the high-beam indicator on the instrument panel you. This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass. Release the lever to return to normal operation. pull the turn signal lever toward you.2 km). will also be on. Turn Signal On Chime It works even if your headlamps are in the If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile automatic position. (1. With this flasher installed. cluster will come on.

If they’re frozen to the windshield. The closer to LO. Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. and past the delay settings for wiping steady at high speed. located worn or damaged. Then let it go. A circuit MIST: Turn the band to MIST for a single wiping cycle. Turn the band to choose the delay time. snow or ice to prevent an overload. the shorter the delay. LO (Low Speed): Turn the band away from you to LO and past the delay settings for steady wiping at low speed. upward or downward Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. hold the band on MIST longer. The windshield wipers will stop after one wipe. on the multifunction lever. carefully loosen or thaw them. 2-50 .Windshield Wipers OFF: Turn the band to OFF to turn off the windshield wipers. (Delayed Wiping): You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes. Clear away Hold it until the windshield wipers start. breaker will stop them until the motor cools. get new blades or blade inserts. to HI. If your blades do become To operate the windshield wipers turn the band. If you want more wipes. HI (High Speed): Turn the band away from you.

wipers will clear the window and then either stop or return to your preset speed. To spray the instrument panel to the washer fluid on the windshield. However. check your fluid level. press the wash button located on the control. the rear window washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.Windshield Washer Rear Window Washer/Wiper There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer This control is located on symbol at the top of the multifunction lever. blocking your vision. slide the control to either LO or HI. slide the control to HI. The right of the steering wheel. The control must be in either LO or HI. The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as the windshield washer. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield. To wash the window. slide the control to OFF. To turn the wiper off. don’t use your washer until the windshield is warmed. For steady wiping. CAUTION: In freezing weather. 2-51 . To turn the rear wiper on. For delayed wiping. If you can wash your windshield but not your rear window. push the paddle. slide the control to LO.

you can CAUTION: maintain a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more D Cruise control can be dangerous where you without keeping your foot can’t drive safely at a steady speed. Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads. the cruise control will shut off.Cruise Control (If Equipped) With cruise control. the cruise control will shut off. Cruise control does not D Cruise control can be dangerous on work at speeds below about slippery roads. If you have a manual transmission and you apply your brakes or push the clutch pedal. If you have an automatic transmission and you apply your brakes. roads or in heavy traffic. So. fast changes 25 mph (40 km/h). and you could lose control. in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning. on the accelerator. On such roads. This can don’t use your cruise control on winding really help on long trips. 2-52 .

2-53 . switch at R/A. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you leave your cruise control switch on when you can move the cruise control switch briefly from ON you’re not using cruise. Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. you might hit a button to R/A (Resume/Accelerate). 2. Press in the SET button at the end of the lever and release it. This. 4. You You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and could be startled and even lose control. Keep the stay there.Setting Cruise Control Resuming a Set Speed Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake. 3. the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake. If you hold the switch at R/A. shuts off CAUTION: the cruise control. So unless you want to go faster. Get up to the speed you want. and go into cruise when you don’t want to. of course. cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control. don’t hold the 1. Move the cruise control switch to ON. But you don’t need to reset it.

Of course. applying the brake D Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier. Press the button at the end of the lever. When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition. 2-54 . You’ll now accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. then release When going up steep hills. There are two ways to turn off the cruise control: Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control D Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the clutch D Press in the SET button at the end of the lever until pedal. you may want to step on the the button and the accelerator pedal. you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down. and be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on then release the switch. D To slow down in very small amounts. Each time you do this.Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control Using Cruise Control on Hills There are two ways to go to a higher speed: How well your cruise control will work on hills depends D Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed. Many drivers find this to there until you get up to the speed you want. press the SET Erasing Speed Memory button briefly. When going cruise at the higher speed. your vehicle will go about Ending Cruise Control 1 mph (1. upon your speed. Hold it takes you out of cruise control. you reach the lower speed you want.6 km/h) slower.6 km/h) faster. Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. your cruise control set speed memory is erased. Each time you do this. then release it. When you take your foot off the pedal. move the switch briefly to R/A. if you have a manual transmission. very small amounts. you’ll go about 1 mph (1. load and the steepness of the hills. downhill. D Move the cruise switch to OFF. To increase your speed in steep hills.

Exterior Lamps The exterior lamps control has three positions: (Parking Lamps): Turning the exterior lamps control to this position turns on the parking lamps together with the following: D Parking Lamps D Sidemarker Lamps D Taillamps D License Plate Lamps D Instrument Panel Lights (Headlamps): Turning the exterior lamps control to this position turns on the headlamps. together with the previously listed lamps and lights. (Off): Turn the exterior lamps control all the way The control on the driver’s side of the instrument panel counterclockwise to turn off the lamps and put the operates the exterior lamps system in automatic headlamp mode. 2-55 .

In the automatic mode. normal brightness along with other lamps such as the taillamps. system. Then start your vehicle. 2-56 . To turn the chime off.Automatic Headlamp System To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp system off. set the parking brake while the ignition is When it is dark enough outside. The automatic headlamp headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the system will stay off until you release the parking brake. turn the control all and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running the way to the left or turn the instrument panel Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so brightness thumbwheel down to the fully dimmed that driving under bridges or bright overhead street position. sidemarker. the driver’s door is opened and your ignition is in OFF. parking lamps and the instrument As with any vehicle. This is normal. you should turn on the regular panel lights. your automatic off. See “Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)” later in Be sure it is not covered or the system will be on this section for more information whenever the ignition is on. Lamps On Reminder The system may also turn on your headlamps when driving through a parking garage. the headlamps turn off lights does not affect the system. automatic headlamp system will only be affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay. LOCK or There is a delay in the transition between the daytime ACCESSORY. The radio lights will also be dim. Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the top You may be able to turn off your automatic headlamp of the instrument panel under the radio speaker grill. parking lamps are manually turned on. headlamps when you need them. The DRL and once the ignition key is in OFF. heavy overcast A reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or weather or a tunnel.

After the fourth press of the button. or turn the ignition to OFF and When it begins to get dark. 3. automatic on mode when the ignition is turned to OFF and then to RUN again. the headlamps will then to RUN again. OVERRIDE button four times within six seconds (a chime will sound). automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps. To idle an automatic transmission vehicle with the DRL DRL can be helpful in many different driving off. Press the DOME OVERRIDE button four times D the sensor detects daytime light. set the parking short periods after dawn and before sunset. To return to the automatic mode. but they can be especially helpful in the transmission vehicle with the DRL off. sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on. 1. a chime will sound informing you that the D an automatic transmission is not in PARK (P). vehicles first sold in Canada. put the transmission in PARK (P). To idle a manual conditions. only your headlamps will be on. and system is off.Daytime Running Lamps The DRL system on some vehicles may turn off temporarily while the turn signals are activated. you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it. Turn the ignition to RUN. within six seconds. D the exterior lamp control is in OFF. push the DOME The instrument panel won’t be lit up either. 2-57 . you may turn off the automatic on at reduced brightness when the following conditions headlamp system and the Daytime Running Lamps are met: (DRL) feature by following the steps below: D The ignition is on. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. The following does not apply to vehicles sold in Canada. When the DRL are on. The taillamps. 2. As with any vehicle. The DRL will stay off until you shift out of functional daytime running lamps are required on all PARK (P) or release the parking brake. Fully brake. The system will revert back to the D the parking brake is released. The DRL system will make your headlamps come When necessary.

Fog Lamps (If Equipped) Interior Lamps Use your fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty conditions. If you use Fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam your keyless entry transmitter (if equipped) to unlock headlamps come on. When a door is opened. near the lamp control. the lamps will stay on for a short period of time and will turn off automatically. button again to turn them off. Your parking lamps must be on for your fog Instrument Panel Brightness Thumbwheel lamps to work. the interior lamps will come on for a short fog lamps will come on again. Turn the thumbwheel up to make your instrument panel lights brighter. 2-58 . or the front door handles are button when the fog lamps are on. Press the the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the out position. A light will glow in the When the doors are closed. Turn the thumbwheel all the way up to turn on the interior lamps. Illuminated Entry Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated The fog lamp button is located on the instrument panel entry feature. turn the thumbwheel down. To dim the instrument panel lights. the dome lamps will come on if Press the button to turn the fog lamps on. When the high beams go off. the your vehicle. lifted and released. This feature controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights. The thumbwheel for this feature is located on the driver’s side of the instrument panel next to the exterior lamps control. time whether or not the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the out position.

To return the lamps to automatic lamp to turn it on or off. dome lamps will remain on until they are turned off. button is in the out position. With the button in this position. press the lens on each when a door is open. To turn the lamps off. unless you use the inside rearview mirror. or to can be swiveled to point in the desired direction. they are located on override the illuminated entry feature. the interior lamps will come on when The dome lamps will come on when you open a door. Front Reading Lamps (If Equipped) You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button. unlocked with the keyless entry transmitter (if equipped) or until the ignition key is turned to RUN or ACCESSORY.Exit Lighting Dome Lamps With exit lighting. You can also turn the lamps on and off by pressing the button near each lamp. located Press the button located near each lamp on the overhead below the exterior lamp control. The lamps to come on automatically when a door is opened. located next to the exterior lamps control. In this position. press the button again and return it to the out position. the dome Front Map Lamps (If Equipped) lamps will come on when you open a door. these lamps will stay on for all the way up to the top position. With the button in . If the DOME OVERRIDE thumbwheel. the dome lamps will remain off If you have the mini console. The lamps will also stay on for approximately 40 seconds after you exit the vehicle unless you lock the doors with the keyless entry transmitter. you remove the key from the ignition to help you see You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the while exiting the vehicle. press the button in. remain off. They will automatically come your keyless entry transmitter (if equipped) to unlock on for approximately 40 seconds when the doors are the vehicle. This will If your vehicle has front map lamps. operation. to set the dome lamps console to turn a reading lamp on and off. the a short period of time and then will go out. 2-59 .

vanity. 2-60 . If the battery run-down protection shuts off the interior lamps.Battery Run-Down Protection Mirrors This feature shuts off the dome. it may be necessary to do one of the following to return to normal operation: D Shut off all lamps and close all doors. or D turn the ignition key to RUN. This will keep your battery from running down. glove box and underhood lamps if they are left Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror on for more than 20 minutes when the ignition is off. reading. Push the tab away from you for normal daytime operation. courtesy. Pull the tab under the mirror toward you to reduce glare from headlamps behind you after dark.

A photocell on the back of the mirror senses when it is becoming dark outside. light to show it is on. The mirror will also Press the AUTO button at the base of the mirror to turn return to its clear daytime state when the vehicle is put on the automatic feature. Another photocell built into the mirror surface senses when headlamps are behind you. Press the OFF button to turn the automatic feature off. At night.Electrochromic Day/Night Inside Rearview Mirror (If Equipped) This mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from headlamps behind you. when the glare is too high. the mirror will gradually darken to reduce glare (this change may take a few seconds). The mirror will return to its clear daytime state when the glare is reduced. The button has an indicator into REVERSE (R). 2-61 .

You can fold them before entering a car wash. then use the arrows located on the four-way control pad to move the mirror in the direction you want the mirror to go.Time Delay Power Remote Control Rearview Mirrors The automatic mirror has a time delay feature which (If Equipped) prevents unnecessary switching from the night back to the day position. Outside Manual Adjust Mirror Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the side of your vehicle. 2-62 . Cleaning the Photocells Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean the photocells when necessary. on the driver’s door armrest. Move the selector switch to the left or right to choose the driver’s or passenger’s mirror. This delay prevents rapid changing of These controls are located the mirror as you drive under lights and through traffic. Push the mirrors back out when finished. Pull the mirrors in toward the vehicle.

Convex Outside Mirror Electrochromic Outside Rearview Mirror A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more (If Equipped) from the driver’s seat. the driver’s side outside mirror will adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you. Storage Compartments Glove Box To open your glove box. If your vehicle has this feature. lift the lever on the front of the glove box and lower the door. The glove box should not be open while you are driving. Window Defogger” in the Index for more information. Check your inside also warms the heated outside rearview mirrors to help mirror or glance over your shoulder before clear them of ice. a defogger you could hit a vehicle. 2-63 . Heated Outside Rearview Mirrors A convex mirror can make things (like other vehicles) look farther away than they really are. When you operate the rear window defogger. See “Electrochromic Day/Night Inside Rearview CAUTION: Mirror” earlier in this section. (If Equipped) If you cut too sharply into the right or left lane. snow and condensation. See “Rear changing lanes.

2-64 . See “Driver Information System” later in this section. sunglasses. a temperature The lamps can also be swiveled to point in the desired and compass display and a storage compartment for direction. The overhead console includes reading lamps. a compartment for a garage door opener.Overhead Console (If Equipped) Reading Lamps Press the button near each lamp to turn the reading lamps on and off. Some models have a driver information system in the console.

compartment door are used To install the garage door opener. backing from the hook and loop patch. see “HomeLink Transmitter” in the Index for The pegs inside the instructions on how to use the system.Installing a Garage Door Opener Press it firmly to the back of your garage door opener. the front overhead close to the center of the opener as possible. 2-65 . compartment can be used to conveniently store Center the garage door opener activation button over the opener. as If you have a garage door opener. Add one peg at a time until the garage door opener operates with the compartment door closed when you press the button. the console door button and press the opener firmly If you have the optional HomeLinkR Transmitter. first open the to make sure the button on compartment door by pressing the latch forward. the compartment door will contact the control button Peel the protective on the garage door opener. please into place.

displayed at the front of the overhead console. until the opener The outside air temperature and the compass are operates properly. Adjust the position of the garage door opener and add or remove pegs. as needed. you should only have to press the button slightly to operate the opener. press the button again to make sure the garage door opener operates properly. 2-66 . With the garage door opener positioned properly and the right number of pegs in place. with the compartment Temperature and Compass Display door closed. The control buttons are located to the left of the display. Now.

release readings. Your variance is now set. so it does not need to be manually set. drive in a complete 360 degree circle three zone number. 5. This is a warning to the driver that road conditions may be icy. After five seconds. and that appropriate precautions should be taken. the variance for your particular location: 4. times. 2. Press US/MET until your zone number appears on the display. The display will go blank. Variance is the difference between magnetic north and geographic north. To correct the 1. Press ON/OFF to enter your zone number. If this happens. CAL (Calibration) will appear on the display. However. the temperature indicated will be the last outside temperature recorded with the ignition on.Turn the display on or off by pressing the ON/OFF button. If it does. the difference between 3. follow these instructions to set both buttons. Record your problem. If the outside temperature is 37_F (3_C) or lower when you turn on the ignition. When it does. Display the temperature in either degrees Fahrenheit (English) or Celsius (metric) by pressing the US/MET button. and the compass will function normally. the compass may function erratically. Press and hold both the ON/OFF and the US/MET buttons. In some areas. Find your location on the zone map. Before you turn on the ignition and move the vehicle. the word ICE will appear on the display. VAR CAL (Variance Calibration) the two can be great enough to cause false compass will appear on the display. when your vehicle is new. 2-67 . The compass is self-calibrating.

There is also a lift-out storage tray in Door Storage the console. Four-door models have storage pockets and cupholders If your vehicle has this console push in and release on on rear doors.Sunglasses Storage Compartment Front Storage Area (If Equipped) The console has a sunglasses storage compartment. holders located on the front of the storage compartment. You can pull the compartment down. Then the front lever while lifting the top to open it. store cassettes and compact discs in the slots in front of the compartment. To If your vehicle has this console compartment. You will find a storage compartment on each of the Some models will have a console with pop out cup front doors. The cupholders will pop out for use. squeeze open the compartment press the release button. 2-68 . the cup holder door.

lift passenger side corner. in place during sharp turns or quick stops and starts. You may have a convenience net in the rear of your vehicle to help keep small items. visible from the rear of vehicle). heavier items. Attach the upper loops to the retainers on either side of the endgate opening (the label should be in the upper If your vehicle has the center armrest compartment. like gloves and light clothing. the cover to expose the storage area which includes slots Attach the lower hooks to the rear cargo tie downs on for cassettes or compact discs and a coinholder. the floor. 2-69 . please see the Index for that item. The net is not designed to retain these items during off-road use. The net is not for larger.The console also contains the following components: Convenience Net (If Equipped) D Rear Seat Audio Controls D Rear Seat Accessory Power Outlets D Six-disc CD Changer D Cellular Phone (if equipped) For more information on these components.

CAUTION: An improperly stored cargo cover could be thrown about the vehicle during a collision or sudden maneuver. You or others could be injured. 2-70 .Cargo Cover (If Equipped) Cargo Tie Downs If your vehicle has a cargo cover. When you put it back. If you remove the cover. downs in the rear of your Grasp the handle and unroll the cover. always store it outside of the vehicle. Latch the posts vehicle that allow you to into the sockets on the inside trim panel on the strap cargo in and keep it passenger’s side of the vehicle to secure it. from moving. you can use it to cover There are five cargo tie items in the cargo area of your vehicle. always be sure that it is securely reattached.

Cargo Tie-Down Cutouts 2-71 . People in the vehicle could be injured. Partitions D.Rear Convenience System (If Equipped) CAUTION: If the convenience system isn’t secured properly. located in the rear of your vehicle. Anchor Bracket/Cargo Tie-Down Plugs C. Be sure to secure the convenience system properly. it can move around in a collision or sudden stop. provides a place to store loose items in your vehicle. The convenience system. A. Partition Storage F. Soda Pop/Gallon Jug Holder E. Collapsible Dividers B.

grasp the edges of the plugs and pull straight out. push down gently To remove the entire convenience system. located in the center and on each side of the convenience system 2. the anchor bracket /cargo tie-downs. 2-72 . do the There are two cutouts (E) for the rear cargo tie-downs following: located near the endgate sill. the cutouts must be removed. In order to access the rear 1. See Located on the top of each collapsible divider (A) are “Convenience Net” in the Index for more T-pins designed to hold grocery bags. You may also want to remove the upright position. do the on the partitions making sure both sides fit into the following: appropriate slots of the collapsible dividers (A). procedure. 1. but instead include a and folding the dividers toward each other. partitions (C) and fold the collapsible dividers (A) to make the convenience system easier to handle.To increase the space in the convenience system. Some 2. Remove the individual partitions (C) by pulling cargo tie-downs. smaller storage area. are used to help seal the sides together while sliding the unit out until it the convenience system. in an information. etc. upward on the partitions. the plugs also cover clears the sides of the endgate opening.. To reinstall or rearrange the partitions. the passenger side of the convenience system. The anchor bracket/cargo tie down plugs (B). Remove the convenience net if it is in place. To remove the To reinstall the convenience system. reverse the removal plugs. See “Child Restraints” and “Top Strap” in the Index for more information on using anchor brackets. However. Storage for the partitions is You will also find a soda pop/gallon jug holder (D) on located in area (F). Grasp the sides of the convenience system and push nearest the passenger compartment. Fold the collapsible dividers (A) by pulling upward vehicles do not have this feature.

heavy loads on the roof is not this could cause you or other drivers to have a recommended. and D Carrying small. use the crossrails to keep the load the luggage carrier on top of your vehicle. Just loosen the slider knobs at each end of the If you try to carry something on top of your crossrail and move them to where you want them. This can cause you to lose control. Follow these along. and of course damage your vehicle. CAUTION: You can adjust the crossrails to handle loads of various sizes. plywood. Do not tie downs. damaged. collision.the wind can catch it as you drive Be sure the cargo is properly loaded. These are available through your dealer.like paneling. of the crossrails. What guidelines: you are carrying could be violently torn off. When loading cargo directly on But. and the slider knobs. never carry something longer or wider than the roof panel. Make vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage sure both sides of the crossrails are even. move the crossrails The luggage carrier has slats. 2-73 . so forth -. Also tie the load to the bumpers. from shifting. The adjustable tie provided. at both ends of the crossrails. should be used to the load so tightly that the crossrails or side rails are secure loads to the luggage carrier. side rails and crossrails as far apart as possible. then tighten carrier -. a mattress. You D Secure the load using the tie downs at both ends may be able to carry something like this inside. D If you need to carry long items. Tie the load to the tie downs attached to the roof to secure cargo.Luggage Carrier (Option) Use GM accessory racks that are compatible with your luggage carrier for transporting sports equipment.

That can make it overload. it will pop back out by itself. causing damage. 2-74 . weight as far forward as you can and move the rear crossrail forward as far as possible to keep To use the lighter. press it in all the way. damaging the cargo are still securely fastened. When you carry large things. see “Loading Your Vehicle” in Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand the Index. pull the bin upward. When it’s ready. If you do. For more information on vehicle capacity and loading. while it is heating. Loading cargo that weighs more than 200 lbs. never let them hang over the rear or the sides of your Don’t put papers and other things that burn into vehicle. the load from shifting. cigarettes or other sure it rests on the slats and does not scratch or smoking materials could set them on fire. damage the vehicle. Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when NOTICE: loading your vehicle. Put the cargo against the side rails and fasten it securely to the luggage carrier. back away from the heating element when it’s check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier and ready. Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter NOTICE: Pull the front ashtray door down to open it. When loading cargo on the roof panel. If you do. it won’t be able to To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving. lighter and the heating element. and let go. (91 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage your NOTICE: vehicle. Put the main To remove the front ashtray. be your ashtray.

You can With accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary also swing the visor from side-to-side. D Be sure to turn off any electrical equipment when not in use. you can pull the visor down. A small cap must be pulled down to access (If Equipped) an accessory power outlet. NOTICE: When using accessory power outlets: D Maximum load of any electrical equipment should not exceed 20 amps. panel. Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods can drain the battery. electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or CB radio. Visor Vanity Mirror There are two accessory power outlets located near the Pull the sun visor down and lift the cover to expose the center of the vehicle on the lower part of the instrument vanity mirror. 2-75 . When not using an outlet be Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn sure to cover it with the protective cap. There may also be additional accessory power outlets located behind the front storage area for rear seat Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror passengers.Sun Visors Accessory Power Outlets To block out glare. on the lamps.

see your dealer for additional information on accessory power outlets. warranty. and never use anything that exceeds the amperage rating. be sure to follow the with the accessory power outlet and could result in proper installation instructions included with the blown vehicle or adapter fuses. 2-76 .Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible When adding electrical equipment. Do not hang any type of accessory or Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle accessory bracket from the plug. Check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment. NOTICE: NOTICE: Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. If you experience a equipment. Improper use of can damage it or keep other things from working the power outlet can cause damage not covered as they should. This wouldn’t be covered by your by your warranty. problem.

Accessory Power (RAP) needs to be active.Sunroof (If Equipped) Press and release the rear side of the switch in the mini console to open the sunroof. You can press the forward Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding side of the switch to close the sunroof. To open or close your sunroof. 2-77 . the ignition is closed. press the forward side of the switch to open needs to be in RUN or ACCESSORY or Retained the sunroof to the vent position. The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which you can pull forward to block sun rays. See “Retained Accessory Power” in the Index. Once the sunroof sunroof.

HomeLinkR Transmitter (If Equipped) Full-Size Overhead Console This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Changes and modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. Mini Overhead Console This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference. and (2) this device must accept any interference received. including interference that may cause undesired operation. and (2) this device must accept any interference. 2-78 . including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Programming the HomeLink Transmitter 3. When the HomeLink indicator light begins to blink
slowly (this may take up to 30 seconds), hold the
Do not use the HomeLink Transmitter with any garage hand-held transmitter about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse” away from HomeLink and then press and hold the
feature. This includes any garage door opener model transmit button on the hand-held transmitter.
manufactured before April 1, 1982. Continue to hold both buttons until the indicator
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage light on HomeLink begins to flash rapidly (this may
door you are programming. take up to 90 seconds).
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in If you have trouble programming HomeLink, make sure
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more that you have followed the directions exactly as
accurate transmission of the radio frequency. described and that the battery in the hand-held
transmitter is not weak. If you still cannot program it,
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
move the hand-held transmitter to the left or right or
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
forward or backward or flip it upside down. HomeLink
program up to three channels:
may not work with older garage door openers that do
1. Decide which one of the three channels (one of the not meet current Federal Consumer Safety Standards.
HomeLink buttons) you want to program. If you cannot program the transmitter after repeated
2. Press and hold the desired button on HomeLink attempts, refer to “Training a Garage Door Opener with
through Step 3. Rolling Codes” later in this section or contact the
manufacturer of HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515, or on
the internet at www.homelink.com.
Be sure to keep the original hand-held transmitter in
case you need to erase and reprogram HomeLink.

2-79

Training a Garage Door Opener with 3. Press the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage
Rolling Codes (If Equipped) door opener motor head unit. An indicator light will
begin to flash when the motor head unit enters the
If you have not previously programmed the hand-held training mode.
transmitter to HomeLink, see “Programming the
HomeLink Transmitter” listed previously. If you have Following this step, you have 30 seconds to
completed this programming already, you now need to start Step 3.
train the garage door opener motor head unit to 4. Return to HomeLink in your vehicle and firmly press
recognize HomeLink. and release the programmed HomeLink button
1. Find the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage three times.
door opener motor head unit. The exact location and The rolling-code garage door opener should now
color will vary by garage door opener brand. If you recognize HomeLink. You may either use HomeLink or
have difficulty finding the Learn or Smart button, the hand-held transmitter to open the garage door.
refer to your garage door opener owner’s manual or
contact the manufacturer of HomeLink at If after following these instructions, you still have
1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at problems training the garage door opener, contact the
www.homelink.com. manufacturer of HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515, or on
the internet at www.homelink.com.
2. Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to
have another person assist in programming the
transmitter.

2-80

Canadian Programming Erasing Channels
Canadian Owners: During programming, the To erase all three programmed channels, hold down the
hand-held transmitter may automatically stop two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to
transmitting after two seconds. In this case, you should flash (approximately 20 seconds). Release both buttons.
press and hold the HomeLink button (see Steps 2 and 3
under “Programming the HomeLink Transmitter”) Resetting Defaults
while you press and re-press (cycle) your hand-held To reset HomeLink to default settings, hold down the
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to
is trained. flash (approximately 20 seconds). Continue to hold both
buttons until the HomeLink indicator light turns off and
Operating the HomeLink Transmitter then release both buttons.
Press and hold the appropriate button on HomeLink for
at least half of a second. The indicator light will come Accessories
on while the signal is being transmitted. Accessories for the HomeLink Transmitter are available
from the manufacturer of the unit. If you would like
additional information, please contact the manufacturer
of HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.

2-81

The Instrument Panel--Your Information System

2-82

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Vents I. Rear Window Washer/Wiper
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever J. Rear Endgate Release
C. Instrument Panel Cluster K. Ashtray
D. Transfer Case Button (If Equipped) L. Comfort Controls
E. Exterior Lamps Control M. Rear Window Defogger
F. Fog Lamp Button (if equipped) N. Accessory Power Outlets
G. Brake Release O. Audio System
H. Audio Steering Controls (If Equipped) P. Glove Box

2-83

Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how
fast you’re going, about how much fuel you’ve used, and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely and
economically.

Base Level cluster with Automatic Transmission United States, Canada cluster similar
2-84

Uplevel cluster with Automatic Transmission United States, Canada cluster similar

2-85

Speedometer and Odometer Tachometer (If Equipped)
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). per minute (rpm).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or
kilometers (used in Canada).
NOTICE:
The odometer mileage can be checked without the On vehicles with a manual transmission, if you
vehicle running. Simply press the trip odometer button. operate the engine with the tachometer in the
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a shaded warning areas, your vehicle’s engine or
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the other parts of your vehicle could be damaged.
mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be. But if Damage to your engine or vehicle caused by
it can’t, then it’s set at zero, and a label must be put on operating the engine with the tachometer in the
the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when shaded warning areas isn’t covered by your
the new odometer was installed. vehicle warranty. Don’t operate the tachometer
Trip Odometer in the shaded warning areas.
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
To view the trip odometer, press the button near the
readout. To reset the trip odometer, hold the button until
it resets.

2-86

Warning Lights, Gages and When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
Indicators there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
This part describes the warning lights and gages that what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
locate them. dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an Safety Belt Reminder Light
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you or When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
others from injury. come on for about eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you The safety belt light will
will see in the details on the next few pages, some also come on and stay
warning lights come on briefly when you start the on for about 20 seconds,
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are then it will flash for about
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed 55 seconds.
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
there’s a problem with your vehicle. nor the light will come on.

2-87

This means The air bag readiness light should flash for a few the system is ready. or they diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag system. the wiring and the crash sensing and your vehicle may not inflate in a crash. and it will flash for a few seconds. The start your vehicle. see “Air Bag” in the Index. If the light doesn’t come on then. it means the air bag system system check includes the air bag sensors. Have your vehicle serviced right away. which shows the air bag symbol. seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. The air bags in modules. stays on after you start your vehicle. have your vehicle This light will come on serviced right away if the air bag readiness light when you start your vehicle. 2-88 . could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself or others. your air bag system may not work properly. the air bag may not be working properly. The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. If the air bag readiness light stays on after you The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving.Air Bag Readiness Light There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument CAUTION: panel. Then the light should go out.

Charging System Indicator Light Voltmeter Gage The charging system light When your engine is not will come on briefly when running. the gage shows the another electrical problem. large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an extended period. show you it is working. on (in RUN). the low and high warning zones indicate the normal If you must drive a short distance with the light on. but the ignition is you turn on the ignition. If it stays on. certain to turn off all your accessories. condition of the charging system. Have it checked right away. As engine speeds are increased. this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power. Readings between Driving while this light is on could drain your battery. or comes on while you are driving. you may have a problem with the charging system. or When the engine is running. This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle. 2-89 . It could indicate that you have problems with a generator drive belt. be operating range. as a check to charge in DC volts. such as the radio Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a and air conditioner. this gage but the engine is not shows your battery’s state of running. It should go out once the engine is running.

there could be a brake transmission. The light Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully. if you have a manual If the warning light comes on. Have the vehicle If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released. When the ignition is on. turn off all unnecessary accessories. the brake system warning light will come on when you set your parking brake. If one part isn’t working. though. you the instrument panel cluster need both parts working well. problem. For good braking. it serviced as soon as possible. Shift Light Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts. If you must drive. the other part can You have the shift light on still work and stop you. problem in the electrical system.You can only drive for a short time with the reading in Brake System Warning Light either warning zone. See “Shift Light” in the Index. means you have a brake problem. United States Canada 2-90 . Shifting when the indicator light is on will help you get the best fuel economy. Have your brake system inspected right away.

harder to push. If it doesn’t come on then. If the light is still on after you’ve on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s With the anti-lock brake a problem. That’s normal. If the regular brake system warning light is also on. have it fixed so it will be the vehicle towed for service. pull off the engine and may stay on road and stop carefully. your vehicle needs service. It may take longer to stop.This light should come on briefly when you turn the Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ignition key to RUN. If the light stays on. See if the brake system warning light is on. If the light is still on. have light doesn’t come on then. 2-91 . You may notice that the pedal is for several seconds. If the pulled off the road and stopped carefully. the pedal may go closer to the floor. Or. you don’t have anti-lock brakes Your brake system may not be working properly and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. have the vehicle towed for service. system. See “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index. ready to warn you if there is a problem. or comes on when you’re driving. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t on. with the brake system warning light on can lead The anti-lock brake system warning light should come to an accident. you still have brakes. this light will come on when you start your If the light comes on while you are driving. Driving “Brake System Warning Light” earlier in this section. but you CAUTION: don’t have anti-lock brakes.

The vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Service Engine Soon Light in the United States or Check Engine Light in Canada) United States Canada United States Canada Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. 2-92 . If the monitors operation of the fuel. your engine is control systems. This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction. If you Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to assure have been operating your vehicle under normal driving that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the conditions. This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is See “Engine Overheating” in the Index for more required. too hot! This system is called OBD II (On-Board It means that your engine coolant has overheated. ignition and emission gage pointer moves into the red area. system before any problem is apparent. helping to produce a cleaner environment. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the information. you should pull off the road. stop your vehicle.

transmission. If the light doesn’t come on. D Light On Steady -. Modifications made to the engine. exhaust. 2-93 . A misfire increases vehicle emissions and This could lead to costly repairs that may not be may damage the emission control system on your covered by your warranty. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required. when the ignition is on and the engine is not running. your emission controls may not of two ways: work as well. as a check to show you it is NOTICE: working. your fuel economy may not be as D Light Flashing -. detected. have it repaired. This may also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. after a while.A misfire condition has been good and your engine may not run as smoothly. This light should come on. intake or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOON OR CHECK ENGINE light to come on. Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty. NOTICE: Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required. vehicle.An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. If you keep driving your vehicle with this light This light will also come on during a malfunction in one on.

see “If the Light dries out. Find a safe place to park your vehicle. Is On Steady” following. when it is safe to do so. If so. Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water? stop the vehicle. 2-94 . A loose or missing fuel cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.If the Light Is Flashing If the Light Is On Steady The following may prevent more serious damage to You may be able to correct the emission system your vehicle: malfunction by considering the following: D Reducing vehicle speed. If so. If the light is still flashing. If the light continues to flash. see “If few driving trips with the cap properly installed should the Light Is On Steady” following. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been D If you are towing a trailer. your electrical system may be wet. The condition Turn the key off. reduce the amount of left off or improperly installed. making sure to fully install D Avoiding steep uphill grades. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle? D Avoiding hard accelerations. wait at least 10 seconds and restart the will usually be corrected when the electrical system engine. reinstall the fuel cap. turn the light off. the cap. If the light remains on steady. follow the previous steps. cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips should turn the light off. A If the light stops flashing and remains on steady. and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service.

see your dealer or qualified service center to prepare the vehicle for inspection. misfiring.) your vehicle pass an inspection: This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on. Failure to pass this notice this as stalling after start-up. emission control systems have not been completely have your dealer or qualified service center check the diagnosed by the system. be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. This can happen if diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical you have recently replaced your battery or if your problems that may have developed. 2-95 . The vehicle would be vehicle. (These Here are some things you need to know in order to help conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up. on or not working properly. You may equipment on your vehicle. The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving. change the fuel brand you use. battery has run down. If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness. hesitation on registration. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and considered not ready for inspection. Poor fuel quality will cause your may begin programs to inspect the emission control engine not to run as efficiently as designed. Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical If none of the above steps have made the light turn off.Have you recently changed brands of fuel? Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs If so. See Some state/provincial and local governments have or “Fuel” in the Index. acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. stalling when you inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle put the vehicle into gear. Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is If you experience one or more of these conditions. This may take several days of routine driving.

A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or other problems causing low oil pressure. but readings above the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range. You or others could be burned. your warranty. problems can be costly and is not covered by Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals). your engine can become so hot that it catches fire. Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced. 2-96 . If you do. outside temperature and oil viscosity. United States Canada NOTICE: The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in Damage to your engine from neglected oil psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is running. Oil pressure may vary with engine speed.Oil Pressure Gage CAUTION: Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low.

which may system. If the light flashes. see “Content Theft-Deterrent” in the Index for additional information regarding the SECURITY light. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock. This system is and you should see your dealer. there may be a problem with the drive system and If the light comes on continuously while driving and service is required. prevent serious damage to the vehicle. also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing a malfunction. Malfunctions can be indicated by the stays on. If the vehicle fails to start. see “Passlock” The SERVICE 4WD light comes on to indicate that in the Index. there may be a problem with the Passlock system before any problem is apparent.Security Light Service Four-Wheel-Drive Warning Light (If Equipped) This light will come on briefly when you turn the This light should come on key toward START. as a check to show engine starts. Also. 2-97 . The briefly when you turn on the light will stay on until the ignition. the PasslockR system has entered a tamper mode. you it is working.

Try closing the endgate or liftglass again.Tow/Haul Mode Light (If Equipped) Check Gages Light This light should come on The CHECK GAGES light when the tow/haul mode has will come on briefly when been selected. For more information. Gate Ajar Light If this light comes on. you are starting the engine. 2-98 . Never drive with the endgate or liftglass even partially open. the Index. see “Tow/Haul Mode” in If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving. check your coolant temperature and engine oil pressure gages to see if they are in the warning zones. your endgate or liftglass is ajar.

For example.Fuel Gage Here are four things that some owners ask about. the gage may have indicated the tank was half full. United States Canada D The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn off the ignition. the fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have remaining. D The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or speed up. D It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage indicated. 2-99 . When the ignition is on. None of these show a problem with your fuel gage: D At the gas station. the gas pump shuts off before the gage reads full. but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.

and that the Index. COMP/TEMP normally. and holding the MODE and US/MET buttons simultaneously while in the COMP/TEMP mode. if C (Calibration) is displayed. Before you turn on the ignition and move the vehicle. are starting the engine. the compass will display C and you (United States/metric) button allows you to switch the can release the buttons. You may also compass direction and trip information in the place the compass in a noncalibrated mode by pressing overhead console. the display and TRIP. the compass will need to be calibrated. After US/MET (United States/Metric): The US/MET about 10 seconds. so it does not need to be Driver Information Center (DIC) (If Equipped) manually set. 360 degree circle three times at a speed of less than MODE: The MODE button can be used to toggle 5 mph (8 km/h). If the outside temperature is 37_F (3_C) or lower. See “Fuel” in the driver that road conditions may be icy. appropriate precautions should be taken. the temperature indicated will be the last outside temperature recorded with the ignition on. and the compass will function between three modes of operation: OFF. will return to a compass reading. Drive the vehicle in a complete display between the English and metric system. This is a warning to To turn it off. Once the calibration is complete. the display will toggle between the word ICE and the current This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel. add fuel to the fuel tank. However. This system displays the outside air temperature. temperature every eight seconds. The compass is self-calibrating. 2-100 .Low Fuel Light COMP/TEMP(Compass/Temperature): The display provides the outside temperature and one of eight The LOW FUEL light will compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle come on briefly when you is facing.

Variance is the difference between magnetic north and TRIP: Once in the TRIP mode. If this happens. the compass will acknowledge distance that can be travelled with the remaining fuel the variation mode by displaying the current zone in the tank. D RANGE: The display indicates the estimated 3. release both buttons. 4. Record your zone number. Press US/MET until your zone number appears on D FUEL USED: The fuel used since the last reset the display. Press and hold both the MODE and the US/MET driving is displayed. In some areas. buttons in the COMP/TEMP mode. few hours of driving. Press MODE to enter your zone number. After five seconds. Find your location on the zone map earlier in this D INST ECON (Instantaneous Economy): section. follow these instructions to set D AVG ECON (Average Economy): The average fuel the variance for your particular location: economy since the last reset is displayed. the difference between MODE button will step you through the following the two can be great enough to cause false compass TRIP functions: readings. All three modes are reset simultaneously. is displayed. Reset can only be performed in the AVG ECON. based on the fuel economy for the last number. Your D AVG SPEED (Average Speed): The average speed variance is now set and the display will return to the since the last reset is displayed. All functions will be displayed briefly once the system is reset. Instantaneous fuel economy for the last second of 2. 1. pressing the geographic north. COMP/TEMP mode. 5. When it does. 2-101 . press the MODE and US/MET buttons simultaneously for at least two seconds. FUEL USED and AVG SPEED modes. To reset the trip computer.

Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle. you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems In this section. 3-2 Comfort Controls 3-29 AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player 3-2 Standard Climate Control System with Radio Data System (RDS) and Automatic 3-3 Air Conditioning Tone Control (If Equipped) 3-4 3-37 AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player (BoseR) (If Equipped) Heating 3-4 Defogging and Defrosting 3-4 Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped) 3-41 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and Compact 3-5 Ventilation System Disc Player with Radio Data System (RDS) and 3-6 Audio Systems Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped) 3-6 Setting the Clock for Systems with SET Button 3-51 AM-FM Stereo with Six-Disc Compact Disc 3-6 Setting the Clock for Systems with HR and Player with Programmable Equalization and MN Buttons Radio Data System (RDS) (If Equipped) 3-7 Setting the Clock for Systems with Radio 3-62 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) (If Equipped) Data System 3-64 Remote Cassette Tape Player (If Equipped) 3-7 AM-FM Stereo 3-66 Console-Mounted CD Changer (If Equipped) 3-9 AM-FM Stereo 3-70 Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped) 3-12 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player 3-73 Theft-Deterrent Feature RDS Radios (If Equipped) (If Equipped) 3-73 Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped) 3-15 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and 3-74 Understanding Radio Reception Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped) 3-75 Tips About Your Audio System 3-20 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape 3-76 Player (BoseR) (If Equipped) Care of Your Cassette Tape Player 3-77 Care of Your Remote Cassette Tape Player 3-24 AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and 3-78 Care of Your Compact Discs Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped) 3-78 Care of Your Compact Disc Player 3-78 Fixed Mast Antenna 3- 3-1 .

This setting directs most of Fan Knob the air through the instrument panel vents and a small The knob on the left side of the climate control system amount through the floor ducts. control panel regulates the fan speed. To increase airflow. OFF: This mode turns the system off. cooling The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the and ventilation in your vehicle. MAX A/C recirculates much of the air inside your vehicle so it cools quickly. relative temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area of your vehicle. Move the knob clockwise toward Standard Climate Control System the red area for warmer air. 3-2 . you can control the heating. move the knob clockwise.Comfort Controls Temperature Knob With this system. move it counterclockwise. Mode Knob The right knob on the control panel allows you to choose the direction of air delivery. MAX A/C (Maximum Air Conditioning): This mode provides maximum cooling with the least amount of work. To decrease airflow. Some outside air will still enter the vehicle whenever the vehicle is moving forward. Move the knob counterclockwise toward the blue area for cooler air.

use Bi-Level A/C to deliver warmer air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument (Floor): This setting directs most of the air panel outlets. through the floor ducts and some air through the windshield defroster outlets. the instrument panel outlets and a small amount through the floor outlets. you may sometimes notice slight changes in your vehicle’s engine speed and (Blend): Airflow is divided equally between the power. 3-3 . Then keep your windows closed (Bi-Level Air Conditioning): This setting cools for the air conditioner to work its best. open the windows long enough to let hot and a small amount through the floor ducts. For normal cooling on hot days. This is normal because the system is designed floor ducts and the windshield defroster outlets. to cycle the compressor on and off to keep the desired temperature.A/C (Air Conditioning): This setting cools and Air Conditioning dehumidifies the air entering your vehicle and directs most of the air through the instrument panel vents On hot days. When the air conditioner is on. should be used to keep odors and/or dust from entering the vehicle. This setting instrument panel outlets. (Defrost): This setting directs most air through the windshield defroster outlets and some through the floor ducts. and dehumidifies the air entering your vehicle and For quick cool-down on very hot days. use A/C (Vent): This setting directs most of the air through with the temperature knob turned to the left. use MAX A/C directs it through the floor ducts as well as the with the temperature knob turned to the left. On cool but sunny days. inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down.

your heating system will produce warmer air faster to heat the passenger compartment in cold weather. Pressing the REAR button on your climate control system will also activate your heated outside mirrors (if equipped). the rear window temperature knob turned clockwise. ice as possible before using the rear window defogger. find the button windshield quickly in extreme humid or cold conditions. If you use the optional engine coolant heater before starting your engine. Use defrost mode to remove fog or ice from the To turn on the rear window defogger. It will only work if the ignition switch is turned to RUN. then release it. humid days. 3-4 . This will help to keep ice and snow from collecting on your mirror surfaces. On cold days. Press the button knob toward high. marked REAR with the defog symbol on the lower right Turn the temperature knob clockwise and move the fan corner of your climate control system. windshield or side windows. Defogging and Defrosting On cool.Heating Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped) The heater works best if you keep your windows closed If your vehicle has this while using it. See “Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index. use floor mode with the feature. until the light in the button comes on. clear the window of as much snow or windshield and side windows clear. use blend mode to keep the For best results. Blend mode is will have lines that warm useful in cool weather when you have fog or ice on the the glass.

The vent cooling is needed. You will find air outlets in the center and on the sides of your instrument panel. 3-5 . turn the thumbwheel below panel outlets. To control the amount of through your vehicle. turn it on again. Ventilation System You can direct the airflow side-to-side by turning the For mild outside temperatures when little heating or thumbwheel located in the center of the vent.The rear window defogger will stay on for five to seven minutes. you could cut or damage the warming grid. NOTICE: Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp on the inside of the rear window. Do not attach a temporary vehicle license. the vent. then turn off. Airflow is through the instrument airflow through the outlets. If you do. use vent mode to direct outside air can be tilted up and down also. and the repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. tape or decals across the defogger grid on the rear window. you can get outside air to flow through by selecting any mode except max A/C and any fan speed. When the vehicle is not moving. If you need additional warming time. Your vehicle’s ventilation system supplies outside air to the inside of your vehicle when it is moving. You can turn the defogger off at any time by pressing the button.

To display the clock with the ignition off. press RECALL or HR/MN and the time will be displayed for a few seconds.Ventilation Tips Audio Systems D Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice. press and hold the right objects. 3-6 . display. reducing the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it chance of fogging the inside of your windows. Within five seconds. This helps air to circulate throughout SEEK arrow until the correct minute appears on the your vehicle. Press and hold MN until the correct minute appears on the display. off. move the to operate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting the fan knob to high for a few moments before driving most out of the advanced engineering that went into it. and reduces the chance of fogging the Setting the Clock for Systems with the inside of your windows. The heater and give years of listening pleasure. Setting the Clock for Systems with HR and MN Buttons Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the display. You will get the and defroster will work far better. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture. first. Find out what your audio system can do and how D When you enter a vehicle in cold weather. Press and hold the left SEEK arrow until the correct hour appears on the display. Set Button D Keep the air path under the front seats clear of Press SET. There is an initial two-second delay before the clock goes into the time-set mode. snow or Your audio system has been designed to operate easily any other obstruction (such as leaves).

it may take a RECALL: Pressing this knob will display the station few minutes for your clock time to update. The clock may be set with the ignition on or off. the display instead. Clock display is available with the ignition turned off. To set the clock to the time of an FM station broadcasting Radio Data System (RDS) information. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. being played or it will display the clock. 3-7 . Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour appears. Press and hold the minute button until the correct minute appears. If the time is not Power: Turn the VOLUME knob clockwise to turn the available from the station. VOLUME: Turn this knob clockwise to increase RDS clock time is broadcast once a minute. NO UPDAT will appear on system on and counterclockwise to turn the system off. have tuned to an RDS broadcast station.Setting the Clock for Systems with Radio AM-FM Stereo Data System Your radio may have a button marked with an H or HR to represent hours and an M. press and hold the hour and minute buttons at the same Playing the Radio time for two seconds until UPDATED and the clock symbol appears on the display. Once you volume. AM or PM will appear on the display for morning hours. MN or MIN to represent minutes.

the station you set will return. Press SET. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons. next or previous station and stay there. Press two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time. SCAN : Press both SCAN arrows. 3-8 . 1. 1. FM1 4. up to three appear on the display. Turn the radio on. SET will appear on the display. 5. your favorite stations. 2.Finding a Station 3. Whenever you press that numbered SEEK : Press the right or left arrow to seek to the pushbutton. Press SET. SCAN will In addition to the four stations already set. then scan to the next two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time and by station. Press one of the four pushbuttons within five TUNE: Turn this knob to tune in radio stations. Tune in the desired station. 6. and FM2. You can set up to 21 stations within five seconds. The display shows your selection. FM1 or FM2. SET will appear on the display. The radio will scan to the next more stations may be preset on each band by pressing station. The four numbered pushbuttons let you return to 3. Whenever you press the same (seven AM. Press the RECALL knob or both SCAN arrows performing the following steps: to stop scanning. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. Tune in the desired station. AM-FM: Press this knob to switch between AM. the station you set will return. play for a few seconds. seven FM1 and seven FM2) by performing two pushbuttons. seconds. Setting Preset Stations 2. Press AM-FM to select AM. the following steps: 4.

VOL (Volume): Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume. Clock display is available with the ignition turned off. Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) BAL (Balance): Turn the control ring behind the upper knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers. PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on and off. you may want to decrease the treble. RCL (Recall): Pressing this knob will display the station being played or it will display the clock. 3-9 . FADE: Turn the control ring behind the lower knob to Playing the Radio move the sound to the front or rear speakers. TREB (Treble): Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease treble. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) AM-FM Stereo BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease bass. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. If a station is weak or noisy.

To scan preset stations. then go on to the next preset and hold the up arrow to increase bass. You can set up to 18 stations TUNE: Turn this knob to tune in radio stations. press and hold one of the SEEK arrows 3. Whenever you press that numbered frequency. the station you set will return.Finding a Station Setting Preset Stations AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM. then go on to the next station. The radio will scan preset position. (six AM. The radio will seek to stations with a strong signal only. To scan stations. Press and hold the are in the selected band. your favorite stations. The radio will go 4. Press AM FM to select AM. seek to the next or previous station and stay there. B and a negative number again to stop scanning presets. FM1 The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to and FM2. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until to a station. 3-10 . the bass level you want or when the maximum or minimum level is reached. Press one of pushbutton. press and release AUDIO on your pushbuttons. The display shows your selection. the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. Turn the radio on. FM1 or FM2. Then press the station frequency. B and a zero will appear on (P1-P6) will appear momentarily just before the the display when the bass level is adjusted to the middle frequency is displayed. Tune in the desired station. press and hold one of the SEEK Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) arrows for more than four seconds until you hear two beeps. play for a few seconds and flash the station you hear a beep. B and a positive station. six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the following steps: SEEK SEEK : Press the right or left arrow to 1. The radio will scan to stations with a strong signal only. Release the up or down arrow when you find stations with a strong signal only. for two seconds until you hear a beep. 2. This feature will only scan the six presets that number will appear on the display. play for a few seconds and flash repeatedly until BAS appears on the display. The radio will go to the first preset station stored AUDIO: To adjust the bass. Press one of the SEEK arrows down arrow to decrease bass. 5. The channel number will appear on the display.

you may want to toward the left speakers. Release the up or down arrow when you find BAS or TRE. R and a the treble level is adjusted to the middle position. Then press and hold the up arrow AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right and to increase treble. If a station is weak or noisy. number will appear on the display when the sound is Release the up or down arrow when you find the treble balanced toward the right speakers. Then press and hold the up arrow to move the button until the display goes blank. F and a number will beep.To adjust the treble. Then press and hold the up arrow decrease treble. 3-11 . F and a zero will appear on the display when the sound is balanced between the speakers. Release the up or down arrow when you find the speaker balance you want or when the maximum or minimum level is reached. T and a positive number will appear left speakers. L and a zero will appear on the decrease the treble. To adjust both To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers. Press and hold the down arrow to appears on the display. press and release AUDIO until TRE Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) appears on the display. select speakers. display when the sound is balanced between the To adjust bass or treble to the middle position. R and a number will appear on the display when the sound is balanced toward the rear speakers. tone controls and both speaker controls to the middle press and release AUDIO until FAD appears on the position. Then press and hold AUDIO for more the speaker balance you want or when the maximum or than two seconds until you hear a beep. press and release AUDIO until BAL on the display. T and a negative number will appear on to move the sound to the right speakers or the down the display. B and a zero or minimum level is reached. appear on the display when the sound is balanced toward the front speakers. CEN will appear on the display. L and a number will level you want or when the maximum or minimum level appear on the display when the sound is balanced is reached. Then press and hold sound to the front speakers or the down arrow to move AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a the sound to the rear speakers. end out of audio mode by pressing the AUDIO display. T and a zero will appear on the display when arrow to move the sound to the left speakers. T and a zero will appear on the display.

L and a zero or F and a zero will appear on the display. To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls to the middle position. If CAL appears on the display it means that your radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle and must be returned to the dealership for service. Your vehicle must be and off. RECALL: Press this knob to display the station being played or to display the clock. Then press and hold AUDIO for more (If Equipped) than two seconds until you hear a beep. Clock display is available with the ignition turned off. VOLUME: Turn this knob clockwise to increase volume. end out of audio mode by pressing the AUDIO button until the display goes blank. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.To adjust balance or fade to the middle position. select AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player BAL or FAD. Radio Messages CAL (Calibrated): Your audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. Then press and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. 3-12 . CEN will appear on the display. Playing the Radio LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the Power: Turn the VOLUME knob to turn the system on TheftlockR system has locked up. returned to the dealership for service.

then go on to the performing the following steps: next preset station. Tune in the desired station. You can set up to 21 stations (seven AM. 3. the station you set will return. the station you set will return. pushbutton. In addition to the four stations already set. Press SET. A SEEK ": Press the right or left arrow to seek to the 6. play for a few seconds. Press one of the four pushbuttons within and FM2. Press AM-FM to select AM. Turn the radio on. 2. FM1 or FM2. favorite stations. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. Turn the radio on. next or previous station and stay there. AM-FM: Press this knob to switch between AM. 6. Press AM-FM to select the band. press both SEEK buttons. Whenever you press the same two pushbuttons. Whenever you press that numbered TUNE: Turn this knob to tune in radio stations. seven FM1 and seven FM2) by performing the 5. 2. SET will appear on the display. The four numbered pushbuttons let you return to your 4. five seconds. FM1 5. Press two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time. 1. RECALL to stop scanning through the preset stations. Repeat the steps for each adjoining pushbuttons.Finding a Station 4. following steps: within five seconds. up to three To scan preset stations. 3-13 . Press either SEEK button or 1. Tune in the desired station. Press SET. The more stations may be preset on each band by pressing radio will go to the first preset station stored on the two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time and by pushbutton. SET will appear on the display. Setting Preset Stations 3.

FADE: Turn the control ring behind the lower knob to EJECT: Press this button to stop a tape when it is move the sound to the front or rear speakers. Press the REV button to stop forwarding upper knob to move the sound to the left or right the tape. Cassette Tape Messages Playing a Cassette Tape CLN (Clean): If this message appears on the display. If a station is weak or noisy. but you should clean it as soon as possible to longer than that are so thin they may not work well in prevent damage to the tapes and player. It will still are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. see “Cassette Tape or decrease treble. See “Care of this player. Press the FWD button to stop reversing the tape. Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. position balances the sound between the speakers. 3-14 . want to decrease the treble. use the VOLUME. Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. REV (Reverse): Press this button to reverse the cassette tape. BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or FADE. Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) FWD (Forward): Press this button to advance the BAL (Balance): Turn the control ring behind the cassette tape. The middle playing or to eject a tape when it is not playing.Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) Once the tape is playing. BAL. Tapes play tapes. RECALL: Press this knob to switch tape sides. TREB (Treble): Slide this lever up or down to increase If an error appears on the display. speakers. for the radio. you may Messages” later in this section. BASS and TREB controls just as you do decrease bass.

Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.CD Adapter Kits AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped) with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player. 2. 3. Turn the radio on. The tape symbol on the display will flash. Within five seconds. press and hold the REV and FWD buttons at the same time for three seconds. VOL (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise to increase volume. showing that the broken tape detection feature is no longer active. This override routine will remain active until EJECT Playing the Radio is pressed. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. use the following steps: 1. 4. 3-15 . PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on and off. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. To activate the bypass feature. The knob is capable of being turned continuously.

The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive. The radio will is available with the ignition turned off.RECALL: Pressing this button will display the station SEEK : Press the right or left arrow to seek to the being played or it will display the clock. FM1 six presets that are in the selected band. overcome noise at any speed. to mute while scanning. preset stations with a strong signal only. SCAN want to use SCV. press and hold SEEK for two seconds and wind noise as you drive. Push the knob back into its stored before the frequency is displayed. play for a few Finding a Station seconds and flash the station frequency. then go on to the next station. Turn it to channel number (P1-P6) will appear momentarily just choose radio stations. The radio will faster vehicle speeds. seek to stations with a strong signal only. turn the control all the way down. as you drive. The sound will automatically increases the volume. then go on to the next preset station. will appear on the display. play for a few seconds and flash the station knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. If you don’t P. Turn the control ring behind the upper a station. SCV scan to stations with a strong signal only. The TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. The sound will mute while scanning. your mute while seeking. The radio will scan position when you’re not using it. audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road To scan station. Press one of control ring allows for more volume compensation at the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning. Set the volume at the until SCAN appears on the display. The display will show your selection. Each notch on the frequency. Clock display next or previous station and stay there. again or a pushbutton to stop scanning presets. The radio will go to desired level.SCAN (Preset Scan): Press this button and P. 3-16 . The sound will SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV. Then. The radio will go to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons. as necessary. Press this button and FM2. This feature will only scan the AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM.

If a station is weak or noisy. knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise 2. six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the decrease bass. feature will switch to one of these program types. Turn the 1. following steps: TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. jazz. Turn the radio on. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.Setting Preset Stations Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. release the button. 5. either press and release the AUTO TONE button until the display goes blank or press and release the BASS or TREB knobs and turn them until the display goes blank. 3-17 . you’re not using them. to decrease treble. the country/western. Turn the your favorite stations. rock and station you set will return and the tone you selected classical stations. To return the bass and treble to the manual mode. Push these knobs back into their stored positions when 4. 3. Tune in the desired station. will be automatically selected for that pushbutton. bass and treble equalization settings designed for Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton. Each time you press the AUTO TONE button. talk. When it returns. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer. The sound AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose will mute. FM1 or FM2. Press AM FM to select AM. You can set up to 18 stations knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to (six AM. pop. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. you may want to decrease the treble. this 6.

play first. The middle If an error appears on the display. Push these knobs back into their stored positions when 1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton or the left you’re not using them. and counterclockwise for the rear speakers. BASS and TREB controls just as you do Turn the knob clockwise to adjust sound to the right for the radio. The tape direction begin playing. The tape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are direction arrow will blink while in previous mode. up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. three-second blank gap is required for the player to stop If the ignition is on but the radio is off. left speakers. A minimum three-second blank gap is required for the Playing a Cassette Tape player to stop at the beginning of the selection. FADE. A minimum EJECT or RECALL. Then. the top side is selected for between the speakers. arrow will blink while in next mode. this player. BAL. 3 NEXT: Press this pushbutton or the right SEEK To load a cassette tape with the ignition off. press arrow to search for the next selection. SEEK arrow to search for the previous selection. see “Cassette Tape position balances the sound between the speakers. the tape will at the beginning of the selection. Turn the The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is knob clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers metal or CrO2 and adjusts for best playback sound.Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) Once the tape is playing. use the VOL. The sound will mute while searching for the next selection. Tapes longer 2 PROG (Program): Press this pushbutton to switch than that are so thin they may not work well in from one side of the tape to the other. The tape symbol and a direction arrow will speakers and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the be on the display whenever a tape is being played. Messages” later in this section. 3-18 . FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. insert the cassette tape. BAL (Balance): Press this knob lightly so it extends. AUTO TONE. The middle position balances the sound Anytime a tape is inserted.

Eject Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license may be activated with the radio off. The lighted arrow will arrow will blink while in reverse mode. Press this pushbutton again to stop CLN (Clean): If this message appears on the display. appear and show the direction of play when a tape is in 5 (Dolby): Press this pushbutton to reduce cassette the active mode. Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Cassette Tape Messages FWD 6 (Forward): Press this pushbutton to rapidly forward the tape. Cassette tapes may from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. The double-D symbol will appear on the EJECT: Press this button to stop a tape when it is display while the player is in this mode. 3-19 . prevent damage to the tapes and player. The tape direction D tape when listening to the radio.REV 4 (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to rapidly AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when reverse the tape. The radio will play the last selected the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. tape noise. but you should clean it as soon as possible to arrow will blink while in forward mode. Dolby be loaded with the radio and vehicle off if this button is and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby pressed first. The radio will play the last selected TAPE AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a station while reversing the tape. The tape direction play tapes. It will still station while forwarding the tape. reversing the tape. forwarding the tape. See “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. playing or to eject a tape when it is not playing. Press this pushbutton again to stop playing a tape.

The knob is capable of being turned continuously. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five seconds. 3-20 . Please see your dealer for details. 4. To activate the bypass feature. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. and a six channel Bose amplifier. This override routine will remain active until the EJECT Included with this audio system are six BoseR speakers button is pressed. It will power up the radio and begin playing. The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds. Playing the Radio PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on and off. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY. 3. Turn the radio off.CD Adapter Kits AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit (BoseR) (If Equipped) with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player. 2. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. indicating the feature is active. VOL (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise to increase volume. use the following steps: 1.

The sound will RECALL: Press this button to display the station being mute while seeking. The display will show your selection. knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. as necessary. Select either the AM. P. Turn it to before advancing to the next preset station. next or previous station and stay there. Each notch on the P. Then. Set the volume at the to stop scanning.MUTE: Press this button to silence the system.SCAN. press and hold either SEEK arrow for with the ignition turned off. the radio display will show the channel number (P1 through P6) for several seconds TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. want to use SCV. Press it SEEK : Press the right or left arrow to seek to the again to turn on the sound. If you don’t before continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons. It will scan through each station overcome noise at any speed. Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re not using it. Press either SEEK arrow again and wind noise as you drive. The radio will scan to stations with a desired level.SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning and listen to a specific preset station. choose radio stations. Clock display is available To scan stations. then audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road go on to the next station. SCV pushbuttons. play for a few seconds. If one of AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM. your radio will scan to a station. turn the control ring counterclockwise. played or to display the clock. two seconds until SCAN appears on the display. The sound will mute while scanning. to and then press P. FM1 or FM2 mode automatically increases the volume. FM1 the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the and FM2. as you drive. Press P. Turn the control ring behind the upper strong signal only.SCAN (Preset Scan): The preset scan button lets you control ring allows for more volume compensation at scan through your favorite stations stored on your faster vehicle speeds. The volume level should stored on your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds always sound the same to you as you drive. The SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV.SCAN Finding a Station will light up on the display while in this mode. 3-21 . location you are in.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions when BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio. insert the cassette tape. or noisy. When it returns. Turn the longer than that are so thin they may not work well in knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to this player. station you set will return. The middle 4.Setting Preset Stations Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to BAL (Balance): Press this knob lightly so it extends. FADE. the you’re not using them. press TREB (Treble): Press this knob lightly so it extends. To load a cassette tape with the ignition off. will mute. six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the speakers and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the left following steps: speakers. Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. 3-22 . Turn the knob clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers 3. use the VOL. Then. Tune in the desired station. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. You can set up to 18 stations Turn the knob clockwise to adjust sound to the right (six AM. The middle position balances the sound 1. you may want to decrease the treble. Press AM FM to select AM. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. between the speakers. Once the tape is playing. your favorite stations. Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and If the ignition is on but the radio is off. The sound position balances the sound between the speakers. EJECT or RECALL. Turn the radio on. Playing a Cassette Tape 5. FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Push these knobs back into their stored positions when Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton. decrease bass. If a station is weak begin playing. Tapes BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. the tape will counterclockwise to decrease treble. BAL. and counterclockwise for the rear speakers. you’re not using them. FM1 or FM2. release the pushbutton. 2.

see “Cassette Tape and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Messages” later in this section. The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license metal or CrO2 and adjusts for best playback sound. Any time a D 5 (Dolby): Press this pushbutton to reduce cassette tape noise. The radio will play the last selected player to stop at the beginning of the selection. The sound will stays in the player and will resume playing at the point mute while searching for the next selection. The tape direction direction of play. pressed first. Press this pushbutton again to stop minimum three-second blank gap is required for the forwarding the tape. (If the radio is turned off. A minimum tape when listening to the radio. The tape direction be loaded with the radio and vehicle off if this button is arrow will blink while in reverse mode. display while the player is in this mode. When a tape is playing. Eject reversing the tape. playing a tape or CD. 3 NEXT: Press this pushbutton or the right SEEK arrow TAPE AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a to search for the next selection.The tape symbol and a direction arrow will be on the display whenever a tape is being played. Dolby If an error appears on the display. The tape direction direction arrow will blink while in previous mode. arrow will blink while in forward mode. 2 PROG (Program): Press this pushbutton to switch AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when from one side of the tape to the other. Laboratories Licensing Corporation. The radio will play the last selected may be activated with the radio off. the top side is selected for play first. where it stopped. three-second blank gap is required for the player to stop a lighted arrow will appear on the display and show the at the beginning of the selection. The double-D symbol will appear on the tape is inserted.) REV 4 (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to rapidly EJECT: Press this button to stop a tape when it is reverse the tape. 1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton or the left FWD 6 (Forward): Press this pushbutton to rapidly SEEK arrow to search for the previous selection. the tape arrow will blink while in next mode. from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. A forward the tape. Press this pushbutton again to stop playing or to eject a tape when it is not playing. The tape station while forwarding the tape. 3-23 . Cassette tapes may station while reversing the tape.

This override routine will remain active until EJECT is pressed. Playing the Radio 3. but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. Turn the radio off. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY. CD Adapter Kits It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player. 3-24 . VOL (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise to increase 4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. It will power volume. It will still play tapes. The knob is capable of rotating continuously. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on five seconds. use the following steps: 1.Cassette Tape Messages AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player CLN (Clean): If this message appears on the display. flash for two seconds. and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped) the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. indicating the feature is active. The tape symbol on the display will and off. See “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. up the radio and begin playing. To activate the bypass feature. 2.

The radio will scan to the first preset station stored on your Finding a Station pushbuttons.SCAN (Preset Scan): Press this button to scan being played or it will display the clock. as you drive. pushbuttons. choose radio stations. Clock display through your favorite stations stored on your is available with the ignition turned off. position when you’re not using it. The channel number and FM2. press and hold either SEEK arrow for faster vehicle speeds. Turn the control ring behind the upper will mute while seeking. The display will show your selection. Then. Press this button again or one of the AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM. The volume level should go on to the next station. (P1 through P6) will appear with the frequency. RECALL: Pressing this button will display the station P. The sound desired level. Turn it to radio will scan preset stations with a strong signal only. play for a few seconds. The sound will mute while scanning. The radio will scan to stations with a want to use SCV. knob clockwise to adjust the SCV.SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV. strong signal only. Press either SEEK arrow again always sound the same to you as you drive. Push the knob back into its stored The sound will mute while scanning. Set the volume at the will seek to stations with a strong signal only. turn the control all the way down. SCV two seconds until SCAN appears on the display. then go on to the next station. The radio and wind noise as you drive. The automatically increases the volume. P. FM1 pushbuttons to stop scanning. your SEEK : Press the right or left arrow to seek to the audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road next station or previous station and stay there. The TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Each notch on the control ring allows for more volume compensation at To scan stations. to radio will scan to a station. then overcome noise at any speed. as necessary.SCAN will appear on the display. 3-25 . play for a few seconds. If you don’t to stop scanning.

Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and 2. jazz.Setting Preset Stations Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. you may want to decrease the treble. the country/western. rock and station you set will return and the tone you selected classical stations. To return the bass and treble to the manual mode. You can set up to 18 stations knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to (six AM. feature will switch to one of these program types. counterclockwise to decrease treble. The sound AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose will mute. release the pushbutton. FM1 or FM2. pop. When it returns. 1. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. you’re not using them. talk. following steps: TREB (Treble): Press this knob lightly so it extends. Push these knobs back into their stored positions when 4. bass and treble equalization settings designed for Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton. six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the decrease bass. either press and release the AUTO TONE button until the display goes blank or press and release the BASS or TREB knobs and turn them until the display goes blank. 3-26 . this 6. Each time you press the AUTO TONE button. 5. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer. If a station is weak or noisy. will be automatically selected for that pushbutton. 3. Turn the radio on. Press AM FM to select AM. Tune in the desired station. Turn the your favorite stations. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

label side up. Release this pushbutton to If an error appears on the display. Press this pushbutton again to speakers and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the left return to normal play. 3-27 . You will hear the you’re not using them. position balances the sound between the speakers. The next track knob clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers number will appear on the display. CD and a CD symbol will also appear on advance rapidly within a track. The middle position balances the sound 3 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to search for the next between the speakers. the letters play at high speed while you press this pushbutton. Sound is continue moving forward or backward through the disc. and 1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to search for a the left arrow is the same as PREV. The middle this mode. the player will more than once. This allows you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired passage. the disc will advance further. the disc will advance further. If you hold this pushbutton or press it arrow is held or pressed more than once. Sound is muted in and counterclockwise for the rear speakers. speakers. tracks on the disc in random order. track. This allows you to listen and find out when the disc is Playing a Compact Disc at the desired passage. SEEK : The right arrow is the same as NEXT. Turn the once. disc play at high speed while you press this pushbutton. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. muted in this mode. REV 4 (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to Push these knobs back into their stored positions when return rapidly to a favorite passage. see “Compact Disc resume playing. RANDOM will Turn the knob clockwise to adjust sound to the right appear on the display. The player will pull it in.Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) 2 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to play the BAL (Balance): Press this knob lightly so it extends. If the right or left the previous track. You will hear the disc the display. Messages” later in this section. Release this pushbutton to resume playing. CD will be next to the CD symbol. Wait a few seconds and the disc FWD 6 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to should play. Insert a disc partway into the slot. Anytime you are playing a CD.

the disc should play. try a known good CD. The CD symbol will still display but the normal. press this button to load a CD. The track number will also appear when a new track begins to play. When the same or a new disc corrected. D It is dirty. When the temperature returns to playing a CD. When the ignition is off. the disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the point where it stopped. If a compact disc is left sitting in the opening for more than a few seconds. road becomes smooth the disc should play. the disc will start playing on track one. scratched or wet. When a disc is playing. Press RECALL to make ERR go off of the display. the player and will resume playing at the point where it stopped. Elapsed time is comes out. CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a D The air is very humid. contact your dealer. If the radio is turned off. FM1 or FM2. AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when D If it’s very hot.RECALL: Press this button to see what track is playing. D The disc is upside down. the player will pull the CD back in. for any other display. wait about an hour CD when listening to the radio.) the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear on the D If the CD is not playing correctly. When the this button again to return to the time display. Press D If you’re driving on a very rough road. 3-28 . The radio will continue playing. EJECT: Press this button to eject the disc from the If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be player and play the radio. Compact Disc Messages Press it again within five seconds to see how long the ERR (Error): If this message appears and the disc CD has been playing that track. it could be for one of the following reasons: displayed in minutes and seconds. is inserted. word CD will be replaced with either AM. and try again. the disc stays in reason. (If so. If the radio is turned off.

AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player Playing the Radio with Radio Data System (RDS) and PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped) and off. The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive. your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive. select OFF. MEDIUM or HIGH. Then as you drive. DISP (Display): Press this knob when the ignition is off to display the clock. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. Each higher volume setting allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. NONE will appear on the display if the radio cannot determine the vehicle speed. Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to select LOW. automatic volume increases the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any speed. AVOL will appear on the display. VOL (Volume): Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume. 3-29 . If you don’t want to use automatic volume. AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic volume.

3-30 . six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations. Turn the radio on. the next preset station. Whenever you the pushbuttons again to stop scanning. through the current band such as FM1 or FM2. will return and the bass and treble equalization that The channel number (P1 through P6) will appear with you selected will also be automatically selected for the frequency. next or previous station and stay there. PSCAN (Preset Scan): Press and hold one of the 4. radio will scan preset stations with a strong signal only. Tune in the desired station. The display shows your selection. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons. station stored on your pushbuttons. following steps: SEEK : Press the right or left arrow to seek to the 1. play for a few seconds and flash the station frequency. 3. The sound will 2. Press one of the arrows or one of The radio will produce one beep. The radio will scan to the first preset listening to. FM1 or FM2. mute while seeking. The radio will seek to stations with a strong signal only.Finding a Station Setting Preset Stations AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM. the station you set displayed whenever the tuner is in the preset scan mode. Press AM FM to select AM. this function will scan that pushbutton. SCAN will be press that numbered pushbutton. FM1 The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to and FM2. The 6. then go on to 5. The sound will mute while scanning. Press AUTO TONE to choose the bass and treble arrows for more than two seconds and the radio will equalization that best suits the type of station you are produce one beep. You can set up to 18 stations (six AM. your favorite stations. In FM mode. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position. To adjust the fade. jazz. Turn the knob clockwise to be adjusted to the middle position.Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS preset bass and treble equalization settings designed or TREB appears on the display. To return the bass and treble to the manual mode. you may want to decrease the treble. middle position. 3-31 . The display classical stations. pop. To adjust bass and treble to the middle position. talk. Turn the knob clockwise for country/western. rock and or counterclockwise to increase or decrease. will show the bass or treble level. The radio will push and release the AUDIO knob until the display produce one beep and adjust the display level to the goes blank. If a station is weak or Each time you press the AUTO TONE button. push and release the AUDIO knob until and the radio will display ALL. move the sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to move the sound to the left speakers. feature will switch to one of these program types. Turn the knob clockwise to move the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise to move the sound to the rear speakers. this noisy. You will hear one beep left speakers. push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears on the display. push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right and or speaker control is displayed. push and hold the AUDIO knob. The bass and treble will BAL appears on the display.

D receive and display messages from radio stations. Most RDS stations provide their station name. The RDS features of your until you hear one beep. If this or speaker control is displayed. and first PTY available. push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone cause the radio features to work improperly. Some stations also provide the name of System (RDS). Press the SEEK TYPE button or turn the P-TYPE D Seek only to stations with the types of programs you LIST knob to display the program type list. the time Using RDS of day and a Program Type (PTY) for their current Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data programming. Turn the knob either clockwise or counterclockwise D seek to stations with traffic announcements. RDS features are only available on FM stations which push the AUDIO knob. with the audio of the FM station you are currently tuned to. contact the radio station. The list is alphabetical. You can use RDS to display program information Finding RDS Stations and to control your radio. 2. to select a program type.To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position. 3-32 . a radio To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle station may broadcast incorrect information that will position. instead of the frequency. The balance and fade will be radio rely on receiving specific RDS information from adjusted to the middle position and the display will these stations. With RDS your radio can do To find RDS stations. will appear on the display. The radio will produce happens. If D receive announcements concerning local and you select ANY TYPE your radio will seek to the national emergencies. then push it again and hold it broadcast RDS information. want to listen to. RDS information is available. RDS is a system that receives data along the current program. one beep and display ALL with the level display in the When you are tuned to an RDS station. In rare cases. 3. perform the following steps: the following: 1. Press the SEEK TYPE button to activate search. the station name middle position. These features will only work when the show the speaker balance.

DISP (Display): Press this knob to change what appears AM FM (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency on the display while using RDS. the radio will return to the and the radio will return to the last station you were original station and display NONE. to turn alternate frequency off. PTY and the name of the appear on the display. Press and hold AM FM for when the radio is on. station frequency. The radio will not switch to other stations. 3-33 . Press the SEEK TYPE button and the last selected PTY. P-TYPE LIST (Program Type): Turn this knob the alternate frequency feature will automatically be clockwise or counterclockwise to select the Program turned on. Type (PTY) you want to listen to. Finding a PTY Preset Station When you turn the ignition off and then on again. listening to. Press and hold AM FM again for two seconds will activate the RDS default display. The display options are station two seconds to turn alternate frequency on. The radio may switch to stronger program (if available). selected program type. TYPE and a PTY will SEEK TYPE: Press this button to go to a station with appear on the display. if it is not already showing. Pressing this knob will allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the also display an RDS station frequency or program type same program type. AF ON will name. Pressing and holding this knob stations. If the radio cannot find the Press TYPE a second time to seek. NONE will appear on the display selected PTY is not found. If a station with the desired program type. AF OFF will appear on the display. TYPE and the last selected PTY the radio will seek to the first RDS broadcaster of the will appear on the display.

for less than one second. The traffic symbol will flash on If the whole message does not appear on the display. The traffic symbol will flash on the display. play station is tuned to. NO TRAF will appear on the display. and will not work during tests of the that does. announcements. If the current station does not broadcast This function will only work during actual emergency traffic announcements.RDS Messages message at your own speed. If no station is found. press the INFO button again ALERT!: Alert warns of national or local emergencies. This feature is not When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic supported by all RDS stations. When an alert announcement from the display until another new message is received. the information symbol will appear on the Your radio can be programmed to interrupt the playback display. announcements. Once the complete message has ALERT! appears on the display when an alert been displayed. call in phone station that supports the traffic interrupt feature if the numbers. the radio will seek to a station broadcasts. Press this button to see the message. until the message is completed. the information symbol will disappear announcement plays. current station does not. Press the TRAF button once to seek to an RDS information such as artist and song title. INFO (Information): If the current station has a message. appear on the display. 3-34 . emergency broadcast system. When the traffic interrupt feature is on. If the compact disc player is playing. etc. These text messages are from the RDS of a CD or FM station by enabling the traffic interrupt broadcaster to the listening public and may be general feature. comes on the current radio station. To scroll through the TRAF will appear on the display. will stop for the announcement and resume when the TRAF (Traffic): Press this button to receive traffic announcement is finished. the display when seeking for a station that supports parts of the message will appear every three seconds traffic interrupt. it will stop. A new group of words will You will not be able to turn off alert announcements. The old message can be displayed by pressing the INFO even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is button until a new message is received or a different playing. you will hear it.

The sound will mute while seeking. If the compact disc player was insert a compact disc with the ignition off. corrected. the player will continue moving back through the If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be disc. the current track has been playing for more than eight LOCKED: This message is displayed when the seconds. resume play at the point where it stopped. even if the volume is muted or a Insert a disc partway into the slot. label side up. If this pushbutton is pressed and dealership for service. you will hear it. CAL ERR (Calibration Error): This message is 1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the displayed when the radio has not been calibrated previous track if the current track has been playing for properly for the vehicle. display. 3-35 . see “Compact Disc Radio Messages Messages” later in this section.When a traffic announcement comes on the current radio Playing a Compact Disc station. it will go to the beginning of the current track. The traffic symbol and player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing. the compact disc will stay in the player and DISP or EJT. THEFTLOCKR system has locked up. If an error appears on the display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once. The compact disc is playing. TRAFFIC will appear on the display while the traffic The display will show the CD symbol. first press being used. You must TRACK and the track number will appear on the return to the dealership for service. contact your dealer. You must return to the less than eight seconds. If you want to announcement plays.

press the for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the knob until you see the display you want. ON will appear on the display. SEEK : Press the left arrow to go to the start of TRACK and the track number will appear on the the current or previous track. Release it to play the track. The inactive CD will remain normal playing speed. ET and the elapsed time pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at will appear on the display. 3-36 . 3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the reverse quickly within a track. RDM T and the track CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this number will appear on the display when each track starts button is pressed first. Press and hold this current track has been playing. RDM OFF will appear on the display. The sound will mute while seeking. to play. Eject tracks in random. The radio will produce one beep. safely inside the radio for future listening. Press and hold it shown on the display (track or elapsed time). order. To change what is normally six times the normal playing speed. AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio 4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to when a CD is playing. the player will continue moving forward through held or pressed more then once. EJT (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when it 6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the is playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. the player will continue the disc. then hold the normal playing speed. rather than sequential. pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD for more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the when listening to the radio.2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track. Press RDM again to turn off random play. Press and hold this in the player. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than to the start of the next track. Release it to play the track. If either of the arrows is once. moving backward or forward through the CD. knob for two seconds. Press the right arrow to go display. The display will show ET and the elapsed time. The display will show ET and the elapsed time. RDM may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. The CD will stop but remain advance quickly within a track.

contact your dealer.) D If the CD is not playing correctly. wait about an hour and try again.Compact Disc Messages AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player If the disc comes out. When the road becomes smooth the disc should play. for any other reason. Included with this audio system are six Bose speakers and a six channel Bose amplifier. D If it’s very hot. (If so. D It is dirty. D The disc is upside down. the disc should play. corrected. D The air is very humid. try a known good CD. Please see your dealer If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be for details. it could be for one of the (BoseR) (If Equipped) following reasons: D If you’re driving on a very rough road. When the temperature returns to normal. scratched or wet. 3-37 .

The SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV. turn the control all the way down.SCAN will appear on the display. pushbuttons to stop scanning. Turn the control ring behind the upper strong signal only. The radio will scan to stations with a desired level. position when you’re not using it. to radio will scan to the first preset station stored on your overcome noise at any speed. The radio will again to turn on the sound. The radio will scan preset stations with a strong signal only. VOL (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise to increase TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. then go on to the always sound the same to you as you drive. The display will show your selection. 3-38 . SCV pushbuttons. The volume level should pushbuttons. played or to display the clock. Press this button again or one of the want to use SCV. Each notch on the P. Push the knob back into its stored The knob is capable of rotating continuously. and FM2. Press it next or previous station and stay there. play for a few seconds. seek to stations with a strong signal only. The channel number (P1 through P6) will appear with the frequency. as you drive.Playing the Radio Finding a Station PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM. then audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road go on to the next station. Clock display is available To scan stations. Set the volume at the to stop scanning. If you don’t next station. your radio will scan to a station. two seconds until SCAN appears on the display. The sound will RECALL: Press this button to display the station being mute while seeking.SCAN (Preset Scan): Press this button to scan control ring allows for more volume compensation at through your favorite stations stored on your faster vehicle speeds. Turn it to volume. choose radio stations. as necessary. P. The sound will mute while scanning. Then. play for a few seconds. knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. The sound will mute while scanning. press and hold either SEEK arrow for with the ignition turned off. Press either SEEK arrow again and wind noise as you drive. SEEK : Press the right or left arrow to seek to the MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. The automatically increases the volume. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. FM1 and off.

the letters decrease bass. Push these knobs back into their stored positions when Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton. you may want to decrease the treble. Press AM FM to select AM. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. Turn the knob clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers 3. FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. You can set up to 18 stations Turn the knob clockwise to adjust sound to the right (six AM. between the speakers. The middle 4. six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the speakers and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the left following steps: speakers. will mute. The Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) player will pull it in. counterclockwise to decrease treble. CD and a CD symbol will also appear on knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to the display. and counterclockwise for the rear speakers. Insert a disc partway into the slot. The middle position balances the sound 1. If you hold this pushbutton or press it Push these knobs back into their stored positions when more than once. TREB (Treble): Press this knob lightly so it extends. Tune in the desired station. see “Compact Disc Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and Messages” later in this section. your favorite stations. Turn the should play. 3-39 . Sound is you’re not using them. muted in this mode. the previous track. If an error appears on the display. CD will be next to the CD symbol. The sound position balances the sound between the speakers.Setting Preset Stations Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to BAL (Balance): Press this knob lightly so it extends. If a station is weak 1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to search for or noisy. label side up. Turn the radio on. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. station you set will return. When it returns. Playing a Compact Disc 5. the disc will advance further. FM1 or FM2. 2. the you’re not using them. Wait a few seconds and the disc BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Anytime you are playing a CD. release the pushbutton.

the disc stays in the player and return rapidly to a favorite passage. Release this pushbutton to resume is inserted. Sound is muted in playing a CD. The track number 3 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to search for the next will also appear when a new track begins to play. Release this the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear on the pushbutton to resume playing. the disc will advance further. Press track. the player will pull the CD back in. tracks on the disc in random order. Press this pushbutton again to CD has been playing that track. EJECT: Press this button to eject the disc from the This allows you to listen and find out when the disc is at player and play the radio. If a playing. disc track play at high speed while you press this CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a pushbutton. arrow is held or pressed more than once. track play at high speed while you press this pushbutton. the disc will start playing on track one. When a disc is playing. REV 4 (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to If the radio is turned off. the left arrow is the same as PREV. once. If the right or left press this button to load a CD. displayed in minutes and seconds. You will hear the will resume playing at the point where it stopped. Elapsed time is return to normal play.2 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to play the RECALL: Press this button to see what track is playing. RANDOM will Press it again within five seconds to see how long the appear on the display. display. FM1 or FM2. the disc is at the desired passage. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than this button again to return to the time display. If the radio is turned off. You will hear the disc it stopped. the player will continue moving forward or backward through the CD. When the ignition is off. compact disc is left sitting in the opening for more than SEEK : The right arrow is the same as NEXT. word CD will be replaced with either AM. The radio will continue playing. This allows you to listen and find out when CD when listening to the radio. When the same or a new disc the desired passage. The next track AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when number will appear on the display. The CD symbol will still display but the this mode. the disc stays in FWD 6 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to the player and will resume playing at the point where advance rapidly within a track. and a few seconds. 3-40 .

Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display.) D If it’s very hot. D If the CD is not playing correctly. 3-41 .Compact Disc Messages AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and ERR (Error): If the disc comes back out and this Compact Disc Player with Radio Data message appears on the display. D It is very humid. for any other reason. D It is dirty. (If so.) D The disc is upside down. When the temperature returns to normal. scratched or wet. the disc should play. (The disc should play when the road gets smoother. wait about an hour and try again. it could be for one of System (RDS) and Automatic Tone Control the following reasons: (If Equipped) D You are driving on a very rough road. try a known good CD.

SCAN will be displayed whenever the tuner is in the NONE will appear on the display if the radio cannot preset scan mode. mute while seeking. The radio will the display. The display will show your selection. AVOL will appear on arrows for more than two seconds. VOL (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise to increase A TUNE ": Turn this knob to choose radio stations. Each higher volume setting station stored on your pushbuttons. In FM mode. select OFF. FM1 and off. The radio will scan to stations with a strong signal only.Playing the Radio Finding a Station PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM. play for a few allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle seconds. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. If you don’t want to use will appear with the frequency. A SEEK ": Press the right or left arrow to seek to the AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic next or previous station and stay there. The radio will scan to the first preset same to you as you drive. Set the volume at the desired level. Then as you drive. this automatic volume. 3-42 . the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any speed. MEDIUM or HIGH. The channel number (P1 through P6) determine the vehicle speed. Press one of the speeds. and FM2. function will scan through the current band such as FM1 or FM2. your audio system adjusts automatically to seek to stations with a strong signal only. The sound will make up for road and wind noise as you drive. The sound will mute while scanning. Press this button to A PSCAN " (Preset Scan): Press and hold one of the select LOW. volume. The volume level should always sound the produce one beep. The radio will volume. then go on to the next station. automatic volume increases arrows or one of the pushbuttons again to stop scanning.

six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease. Press AM FM to select AM. Each time you press the AUTO TONE button. push 3. You can set up to 18 stations BASS or TREB appears on the display. If a 1. press and release the AUDIO knob. station is weak or noisy. rock and 6. 3-43 . and hold the AUDIO knob. To return the bass and treble to the manual mode. following steps: The display will show the bass or treble level. equalization that best suits the type of station you To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle are listening to. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons.Setting Preset Stations Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to AUDIO: Press and release the AUDIO knob until your favorite stations. Tune in the desired station. this feature will switch to one of these program types. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. pop. classical stations. To adjust the bass and treble to the middle position. Whenever you one beep and display ALL with the level display in the press that numbered pushbutton. The radio will produce The radio will produce one beep. Turn the knob (six AM. position. the station you set middle position. jazz. 2. FM1 or FM2. will return and the bass and treble equalization that AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose you selected will also be automatically selected for bass and treble equalization settings designed for that pushbutton. you may want to decrease the treble. Press AUTO TONE to choose the bass and treble beep and adjust the display level to the middle position. talk. or speaker control is displayed. Turn the radio on. country/western. The radio will produce one 4. push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone 5.

and To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position. a radio position. In rare cases. radio. the radio can do the following: To adjust the fade to the front and rear speakers. 3-44 . D receive and display messages from radio stations. Most RDS stations provide their station name. the station name will appear on the display. The balance and fade broadcast RDS information. push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone station may broadcast incorrect information that will or speaker control is displayed. push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it RDS features are only available on FM stations that until the radio produces one beep. these stations. middle position. contact the radio station. the front speakers and counterclockwise to move the D receive announcements concerning local and sound to the rear speakers. push D Seek only to stations with the types of programs you and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears on the want to listen to. instead of the frequency. display. Turn the knob clockwise to move the sound to D seek to stations with traffic announcements.Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) Using RDS AUDIO: To adjust the balance to the right and left Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data System speakers. These features will only work when the To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle RDS information is available. You can the sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to use RDS to display program information and to control your move the sound to the left speakers. The radio will produce cause the radio features to work improperly. If this one beep and display ALL with the level display in the happens. With RDS. the time of day and a Program Type (PTY) for their current programming. push and release the AUDIO knob until BAL (RDS). RDS is a system that receives data along with the appears on the display. national emergencies. Turn the knob clockwise to move audio of the FM station you are currently tuned to. The RDS features of your will be adjusted to the middle position and the display radio rely on receiving specific RDS information from will show the speaker balance. Some stations also provide the name of the current program. When you are tuned to an RDS station.

When name. Press and hold AM FM again for two seconds to also display an RDS station frequency or program type turn alternate frequency off. VOL (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise to increase AM FM (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency volume when RDS interrupts regular play. if it is not already showing. Push the SEEK TYPE button to activate search. on the display and the radio will return to the last station 3. AF ON will DISP (Display): Press this knob to change what appears appear on the display. you were listening to. Press SEEK TYPE a second time to seek. Pressing this knob will stations. The display options are station display. 3-45 . Press and hold AM FM for two seconds to turn alternate frequency on. The radio may switch to stronger on the display while using RDS. the same program type. NONE will appear first PTY available. Pressing and holding this knob frequency feature will automatically be turned on. Type (PTY) you want to listen to. the alternate program (if available). will activate the RDS default display. PTY and the name of the you turn the ignition off and then on again. SEEK TYPE and a PTY will appear on the display. Press the SEEK TYPE 2. Turn the knob either clockwise or counterclockwise button and the radio will seek to the first RDS to select a program type. If a station with the selected PTY is not found. The radio will not switch to other stations. If broadcaster of the selected program type. the radio will return to the original station and display NONE. Turn it allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with counterclockwise to decrease volume. AF OFF will appear on the when the radio is on. The list is alphabetical. Push the SEEK TYPE button or turn the P-TYPE clockwise or counterclockwise to select the Program LIST knob to display the program type list. TYPE and the last selected PTY will appear on the display. If the radio you select ANY TYPE your radio will seek to the cannot find the desired program type.Finding RDS Stations Finding a PTY Preset Station To find RDS stations perform the following steps: P-TYPE LIST (Program Type): Turn this knob 1. station frequency. SEEK TYPE: Press this button to go to a station with the last selected PTY.

the information icon will appear on the display. 3-46 . artist and song title. If the whole message does not When a traffic announcement comes on the current radio station. and will not work during tests of the Your radio can be programmed to interrupt the playback emergency broadcast system. The old message can be displayed by pressing You will not be able to turn off alert announcements. Press this button to see the message. call in phone numbers. the tape or compact of words will appear on the display. the information icon will where it stopped. you will hear it. When an alert announcement TRAF (Traffic): Press this button to receive traffic comes on the current radio station. traffic interrupt feature. If the cassette tape or compact disc player is that does. A new group compact disc player was being used. If the current station does not broadcast if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or compact disc traffic announcements. Press the TRAF button once to seek to an RDS station that supports the traffic interrupt INFO (Information): If the current station has a feature if the current station does not. playing. The traffic symbol message. To symbol and TRAFFIC will appear on the display while scroll through the message at your own speed. This function will only work during actual emergency broadcasts. parts of the message will appear cassette tape or compact disc is playing. If the cassette tape or INFO button again for less than one second. even if the volume is muted or a appear on the display. play will stop for the announcement and resume When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic when the announcement is finished. announcement plays. If no station is found. press the the traffic announcement plays. The traffic every three seconds until the message is completed.RDS Messages disappear from the display until another new message is ALERT: Alert warns of national or local emergencies. the INFO button until a new message is received or a ALERT! appears on the display when an alert different station is tuned to. CD or FM radio by enabling the supported by all RDS stations. received. the radio will seek to a station is playing. it will stop. The traffic symbol will flash on the display. you will hear it. announcements. Once the complete disc will stay in the player and resume play at the point message has been displayed. will flash on the display when seeking for a station that These text messages are from the RDS broadcaster to the supports traffic interrupt. This feature is not of a cassette tape. NO TRAF will appear on the display. When the traffic interrupt listening public and may be general information such as feature is on. TRAF will appear on the display. even announcements. etc.

use the VOL. pressed and the current selection has been playing for more than 13 seconds. up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. You must playing for less than three seconds. first CAL ERR (Calibration Error): This message is press EJT or DISP. three seconds of silence between each selection for previous to work. SEEK and a negative number will tape may not be in squarely. the display while the cassette player is in the previous mode. see “Cassette Tape properly for the vehicle. SEEK and a -1 will appear on the to the right. Tapes longer it will go to the beginning of the previous selection or the than that are so thin they may not work well in this beginning of the current selection. The display will show TAPE and an arrow showing which side of the tape is playing. Your tape must have at least tape and start over. Press EJT to remove the appear on the display. If this pushbutton is pressed and the Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are current selection has been playing from 3 to 13 seconds. dealership for service. A tape If this pushbutton is pressed additional times or held. You must return to the Messages” later in this section. depending upon the player. the selections up to 9. If the ignition is on. AUDIO and SEEK controls just as you do for the radio. but the radio is off. If you hear nothing but a garbled sound. While the tape is playing. The sound will mute while seeking.Radio Messages If you want to insert a tape when the ignition is off. displayed when the radio has not been calibrated If an error appears on the display. it will go to the beginning of the Playing a Cassette Tape current selection. The longer side with the tape visible should face position on the tape. 1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the LOCKED: This message is displayed when the previous selection on the tape if the selection has been THEFTLOCKR system has locked up. the symbol is shown on the display whenever a tape is radio will go to the displayed number of previous inserted. 3-47 . tape can be inserted and will begin playing. If this pushbutton is return to the dealership for service.

The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the 5 SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side radio for future listening.2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the tape. The tape will stop but remain in the player. appear on the display. Eject may be activated with the radio off. The station frequency and REV will pushbutton. Press it again to return to playing speed. You may select stations during once. the player will continue moving forward Press it again to turn Dolby NR off. Press this pushbutton AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a again to return to playing speed. and the left arrow is the same as the PREV tape reverses. SEEK and a positive or 4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to advance negative number will appear on the display. 3-48 . quickly to another part of the tape. Dolby to work. The radio will play the tape is playing. The radio will play the last selected station while the A SEEK ": The right arrow is the same as the NEXT pushbutton. You TAPE CD: Press this button to play a tape when may select stations during forward operation by using listening to the radio. SEEK and a positive number will appear on the display. If you press the pushbutton more 6 D (Dolby): Press this pushbutton to reduce background noise. than once. NR ON will appear on the display. Cassette tapes may be loaded with the radio off if this button is pressed first. The station frequency and FWD will appear on the display. Your tape must have at least Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license three seconds of silence between each selection for next from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. EJT (Eject): Press this button to stop a tape when it is playing or to eject a tape when it is not playing. the player will continue moving forward or reverse operation by using the TUNE DISP and SEEK. of the tape. Press this button to switch TUNE DISP and SEEK. tape rapidly. between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded. and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby 3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse the Laboratories Licensing Corporation. NR OFF will through the tape. backward through the tape. The sound will mute while seeking. last selected station while the tape advances. If the arrow is held or pressed more than appear on the display.

see “Compact Disc counterclockwise with a pencil. 3-49 . the player will continue moving forward through If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be the disc. TRACK and the track number will appear on the to get the cassette out. The sound will mute while seeking. label side up. display. The sound will mute while seeking. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once. corrected. the following errors. Attempt track. your tape 1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the may be damaged and should not be used in the previous track if the current track has been playing for player. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the open DISP or EJT. cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. the current track has been playing for more than D The tape is broken. eight seconds. first press hubs.Cassette Tape Messages Playing a Compact Disc CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If CHK TAPE appears on Insert a disc partway into the slot. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once. prevent damage to the tapes and player. The display will show the CD symbol. end down and try to turn the right hub If an error appears on the display. If this pushbutton is pressed and working properly. it will go to the beginning of the current D The tape is wrapped around the tape head. If the hubs do not turn easily. Try a new tape. See “Care of TRACK and the track number will appear on the Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. Try a new tape. but you should clean it as soon as possible to 2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track. If you want to D The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the tape insert a compact disc with the ignition off. The the radio display. Try a new tape to make sure your player is less than eight seconds. Turn the tape over Messages” later in this section. It will still play tapes. contact your dealer. the disc. the player will continue moving back through the CLEAN: If this message appears on the display. display. and repeat. the tape won’t play because of one of player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing.

3-50 . pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at TAPE CD: Press this button to play a tape when six times the normal playing speed. number will appear on the display when each track starts CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this to play. Eject ON will appear on the display. the player will continue moving backward or forward through the CD. Press and hold this current track has been playing. Press this pushbutton again to turn off random button is pressed first. A SEEK ": Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current or previous track. press the more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the normal knob until you see the display you want. RDM T and the track may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. play. The knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep. rather than sequential. Press and hold it for listening to the radio. The CD will stop but remain in advance quickly within a track. RDM OFF will appear on the display. To change what is normally six times the normal playing speed. RDM is playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. then hold the playing speed. Press the right arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either of the arrows is held or pressed more then once. normal playing speed. ET and the elapsed time pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at will appear on the display. Press this button to switch more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded. Press and hold this the player. Release it to play the passage. Press and hold it for shown on the display (track or elapsed time).3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the reverse quickly within a track. 6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the EJT (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when it tracks in random. radio for future listening. Release it to play the passage. display will show ET and the elapsed time. order. The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the The display will show ET and the elapsed time. AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio 4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to when a CD is playing.

it could be for one of the Disc Player with Programmable following reasons: Equalization and Radio Data System (RDS) D If you’re driving on a very rough road. D The air is very humid. wait about an hour and try again. D The disc is upside down.Compact Disc Messages AM-FM Stereo with Six-Disc Compact If the disc comes out. the disc should play. for any other reason. (If so.) D If the CD is not playing correctly. When the temperature returns to normal. contact your dealer. D If it’s very hot. When the (If Equipped) road becomes smooth the disc should play. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be corrected. try a known good CD. scratched or wet. 3-51 . D It is dirty.

then go on to with the ignition off will display the clock the next preset station. PRESET SCAN select OFF. volume. t u SCAN : Press and hold either SCAN arrow for two seconds until SC appears on the display and you Set the volume at the desired level. as necessary. play for a few select MIN. Press this button to hear a beep. The sound will feature called automatic volume. If you don’t want to use automatic volume. RCL (Recall): Push this knob to display the station The radio will go to a preset station stored on your being played or to display the clock. preset scan mode. t u SEEK : Press the right or left arrow to go to the AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): Your system has a next or previous station and stay there. The radio will go to a station. SCAN arrow again to stop scanning. Press either for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. The sound will mute while scanning. The display shows your selection. then go on to the next station. press and hold either SCAN as you drive. You will hear a double beep. audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive. Each higher choice allows seconds. and FM2. The sound will mute while scanning.Playing the Radio Finding a Station PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. 3-52 . VOLUME: Turn the knob clockwise to increase TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations. If you press SCAN Then. to overcome noise at any speed. will appear on the display. automatic volume increases the for more than four seconds. The volume level should always sound the same to you To scan preset stations. the radio will change to volume. With this feature. FM1 and off. arrow for more than four seconds. your mute while seeking. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning presets. Pushing this knob pushbuttons. MED or MAX. as you drive. play for a few seconds.

Then you will be able to manually adjust the AUDIO: Push the AUDIO knob until BASS. select BASS. midrange and treble using the AUDIO knob. Turn the knob to increase or decrease. To return to the manual mode (CUSTOM). jazz. equalization settings designed for country. You can set up to 18 stations the AUDIO knob. MID or TREB and push and hold your favorite stations. push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is displayed. rock and classical program types. When you use this knob. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization that best allows you to choose preset bass. position. 3-53 . 5. pop. TREB appears on the display. following steps: To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle 1. Tune in the desired station. MID or bass. one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display. Whenever you press that The program type last chosen will appear on the display numbered pushbutton. AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): This feature 4. The radio will produce one beep and (six AM. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. 6. you may want to decrease the treble. another program type will appear on the automatically selected for that pushbutton. 3. display and AUTO EQ will switch to one of the preset program types. Each time you press and the equalization that you selected will also be this button. talk. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Press AM FM to select AM. Turn the radio on. the radio’s tone setting will switch to custom. FM1 or FM2. The radio will produce 2.Setting Preset Stations To adjust bass. midrange or treble to the middle The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to position. press the Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM appears on the display. six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the adjust the display level to zero. the station you set will return when you first press AUTO EQ. midrange and treble suits the type of station selected. If a station is weak or noisy.

The radio will cause the radio features to work improperly. the display. RDS features are only available for use on FM stations select balance or fade and push and hold the AUDIO which broadcast RDS information. Turn the knob to adjust the sound to the D receive announcements concerning local and front or rear speakers. contact the radio station. Turn the knob to adjust the sound to the features. the station name will appear on the display. and sound between the speakers. Most RDS stations provide their station name. The RDS features of knob. With RDS. If this produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on happens. D receive and display messages from radio stations. The middle position balances the national emergencies. from these stations. The radio will beep once and will adjust the your radio rely upon receiving specific RDS information display level to the middle position. want to listen to. D seek to stations with traffic announcements. To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers. instead of the frequency. push and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD appears on the display. push and hold the AUDIO knob when tone station may broadcast incorrect information that will or speaker controls are not displayed. In rare cases. a radio position. These features will only work when To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle the RDS information is available. RDS mode gives you many useful new on the display. the time of day and a Program Type (PTY) for their current programming. To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position. When you are tuned to an RDS station. The middle position balances the D Seek only to stations with the types of programs you sound between the speakers. 3-54 . the radio can do the following: left or right speakers.Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) Using RDS AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right and Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data left speakers. push the AUDIO knob until BAL appears System (RDS).

Press and hold AM FM for two light next to the button will turn on. The radio may switch to stronger stations. the alternate will be used for seek or scan modes. AF OFF will appear on the listen to. press and hold the You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2) by P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY performing the following steps: you want to interrupt on. is broadcast. compact disc. The last PTY selected you turn the ignition off and then on again. If a station with the frequency feature will automatically be turned on. the PTY you set will return. NONE FOUND will appear on the display. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY. the Setting PTY Preset Stations radio will search for stations with traffic announcements The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your and the selected PTY. The radio will not switch to other stations. Press P-TYPE to activate program type mode. To use the PTY interrupt feature. When you are listening to a 1. These buttons have factory PTY presets. If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. Press AM FM to select FM1 or FM2. Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton. Press the SEEK arrows to find radio stations display. The last selected seconds to turn alternate frequency on. 5. PTY and the same program type. When for the PTY you want to listen to. appear on the display.Finding a PTY Station AM FM (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency P-TYPE (Program Type): This button is used to turn allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the on and off Program Type (PTY) selections. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep. selected PTY is not found. 3. 4. 3-55 . the last selected RDS FM station will interrupt play if that selected program type format 2. AF ON will PTY will appear on the display for five seconds. favorite PTYs. Press and hold AM FM again for two seconds to Turn the P-TYPE knob to select the PTY you want to turn alternate frequency off.

the not appear on the display. INFO will disappear from the display until another new message is received. it will stop. Once the complete message has been displayed. To see the parts of the message faster than every three seconds. INFO will appear on the display. A new group of words will appear on the display. If no station is found. 3-56 . parts of the message will compact disc will stay in the player and resume play at appear every three seconds until the message is the point where it stopped. TRAF will appear on the display alert announcements. even if the volume is muted or a compact does. play will stop for the announcement and resume when NONE FOUND will appear on the display. When the radio finds a station that broadcasts disc is playing. When a traffic announcement comes on the current radio INFO (Information): If the current station has a station or a related network station. completed. The traffic announcement brackets will or local emergencies. Press this even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is button to see the message. press this button again. the radio will seek to a station that will hear it. you will hear it.RDS Messages TRAF (Traffic): Press this button to receive traffic ALERT!: This type of announcement warns of national announcements. when an alert announcement plays. you announcements. the announcement is finished. traffic announcements. You will not be able to turn off appear on the display. If the compact disc player is playing. When an alert If the current station does not broadcast traffic announcement comes on the current radio station. If the whole message does playing. ALERT! appears on the display if the current station broadcasts traffic announcements. message. If the compact disc player was being used.

To insert one disc. do the following: If the radio is on or off. the disc will begin to equalization setting for your disc. it will be activated play automatically. located to the LOAD CD : Press the LOAD side of this button to right of the slot. with the radio on or off. Messages” later in this section. load CDs into the compact disc player. Wait for the light. Do not try to load more than six. To insert multiple discs. press the LOAD side of 4. the track number will appear on the display. it will be activated each time you play a disc. Insert a disc partway into the slot. 3-57 . Load a disc. number for each disc will be displayed. The player will pull the disc in. the light will begin flashing 1. disc. If more than one disc has been loaded. If you select an If the radio is on or off. The player will pull the disc in. do the following: Once the disc is loaded. Insert a disc partway into the slot. see “Compact Disc button for two seconds. complete turn green. to six discs. to To load more than one disc but less than six. a disc. each time you play a disc. load a disc player will hold up to six discs. label side up. Turn the ignition on. As each new track starts to play. Steps 1 through 3. The disc player takes up CD button.Playing a Compact Disc 2. again. the CD symbol will be When a disc is inserted. This compact 3. Press and release the LOAD side of the LOAD you can load another disc. You will hear a beep and the light. When you have finished loading discs. located to the right of the slot. 3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green. 1. the last disc loaded will begin to play automatically. side up. Press and hold the LOAD side of the LOAD CD If an error appears on the display. If you select an equalization setting for your displayed. the CD symbol will be displayed. Turn the ignition on. label the LOAD CD button to cancel the loading function. Once the light stops flashing and turns green 2. will begin to flash. The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded. When a disc is inserted.

advance quickly within a track. You can now remove the disc. press the PWR knob D Press and release the CD eject side of the LOAD CD off and then on again. and the light will flash to let you know when a quickly within a track. Then press the numbered 25 second time period is complete. The receiver’s 25-second eject timer will reset at each press of eject. The display will show elapsed time. You will hear sound at a reduced disc is being ejected. & When the CD eject side of the LOAD CD button is pressed. playing. push it in manually. This will clear the disc-sensing button to eject the disc that is currently playing. The display will show elapsed time. To play a specific CD. press the CD eject side of the player again. After removing the disc. volume. you will hear a % REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to reverse beep. To eject a disc or discs from the disc Once the player stops and the disc is ejected. remove player. a number will appear on the radio be automatically pulled back into the receiver. before the button to start playing a CD. if you have multiple period has elapsed.Playing a Specific Loaded Compact Disc If the disc is not removed. which will cause LOAD CD (Eject): The CD eject side of this the receiver to not eject the disc until the 25-second time button will eject a disc or discs. the disc will For every CD loaded. discs loaded. Do not repeatedly press the CD eject side of the LOAD If an error appears on the radio display. after 25 seconds. Release it to play the passage. see “Compact CD eject button to eject a disc after you have tried to Disc Messages” later in this section. or feature and enable discs to be loaded into the D to eject all of the discs. If you try display. You will hear sound at a reduced volume. LOAD CD button for two seconds. and the track number will appear. the receiver will eject the disc and REMOVE FWD (Forward): Press and hold this button to CD will be displayed. Release it to play the passage. sense an error and will try to eject the disc several times A small bar will appear under the CD number that is before stopping. first press the CD AUX to push the disc back into the receiver. the receiver will pushbutton that corresponds to the CD you want to play. 3-58 . perform one of the following steps: the disc.

press and hold either SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN D To play the tracks on the disc you are listening to in appears on the display and you hear a beep. Press RPT again to turn if off. do one of the following: t u SCAN : To scan one disc. press and playing a compact disc. Press RDM again to scanning. RDM (Random): With random. t u display. The sound will mute while scanning to the next track. do the following: EQ to select the desired preset equalization setting while D To repeat the track you are listening to. to stop scanning. arrow for more than four seconds until DISC SCAN RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. You will hear a beep and RANDOM disc for ten seconds. if more than the display. you can repeat one track or AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO an entire disc. feature to listen to the first track. ten seconds have passed. See “AUTO EQ” listed previously for more information. 3-59 . Press either SCAN arrow again. Press RPT again to turn it off. press and hold RDM for more than feature to listen to each track of the currently selected two seconds. Press either turn if off. for ten seconds for each disc loaded. Press appears on the display and you hear a beep.RPT (Repeat): With repeat. to stop scanning. Use this RDM to turn it off. press the left arrow while playing the RPT button for two seconds. SCAN arrow again. press and hold SEEK : To seek. RPT will appear on a CD to go to the start of the current track. RPT will appear on the automatically set whenever you play a compact disc. The sound will mute while ONE will appear on the display. Press the right arrow to go to the next track. one disc or on all of the discs. SCAN will appear on the display. The equalization will be release the RPT button. To use repeat. press and hold either SCAN on all of the discs that are loaded. To use random. in random order. rather than sequential order. on through the disc. DISC SCAN will appear on the display. Use this random order. D Press and release the RDM button to play the tracks To scan all loaded discs. If you press the button more than once. D To repeat the disc you are listening to. you can listen to the player will continue moving backward or forward the tracks in random.

2. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two or AM FM: Press this button to play the radio when a more seconds to save the track into memory. The recorded tracks will begin to play in the section for more information. S-LIST To save tracks into the song list feature. press the knob until you see the display you want. SONG LIST is pressed a beep will be heard immediately. S-LIST should not appear in the display. 3-60 . Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections. press the SONG LIST button to return you to the first saved track. When disc(s) is in the player. Check to see that the disc changer is not in song list You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK mode. 20 track selections. turn it off. save. called song list. perform the FULL will appear on the display. 1. following steps: To play the song list. After two seconds of pressing SONG Using Song List Mode LIST continuously. press the SONG LIST button. then hold the knob until the display flashes. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this display. order that they were saved. Select the desired disc by pressing the numbered long the current track has been playing. The track will begin to play. Turn the disc player on and load it with at least one One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the disc. two beeps will sound to confirm The integrated six-disc CD changer has a feature that the track has been saved. This feature is capable of saving 5.P-TYPE (Program Type): Press this knob to see how 3. 4. Seeking past the last saved track will S-LIST is present. To change what pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right is normally shown on the display (track or elapsed arrow button to locate the track that you want to time). If SCAN arrows. If you attempt to save more than 20 selections.

road is smoother. one beep will from the display. Any tracks saved to the song 3. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on. 3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired list again are added to the bottom of the list. 3-61 . write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem.To delete tracks from the song list. When pressing SONG LIST. try a known good CD. the remaining tracks are display. To delete the entire song list. To end song list mode. Turn the disc player on. two beeps will Compact Disc Messages be heard to confirm that the track has been deleted. perform the D The disc is dirty. A beep will be heard. If a disc is ejected. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed seconds. If the CD is not playing correctly. contact your dealer. perform the heard after four seconds. wet or upside down. track to be deleted. 2. When another track is added to the D The road is too rough. After two seconds of pressing the SONG LIST button continuously. and the song list contains saved S-LIST will appear on the display. the tracks will be added to the end of the list. The disc should play when the song list. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more than If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be four seconds. 2. S-LIST EMPTY will following steps: appear on the display indicating that the song list has 1. scratched. Turn the disc player on. for any other reason. those tracks are automatically deleted from the song list. been deleted. If so. be heard immediately. CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio After a track has been deleted. 4. wait about an hour and 1. If your radio displays an two beeps after two seconds and a final beep will be error message. tracks from that disc. S-LIST will appear on the display. followed by corrected. following steps: D The air is very humid. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on. try again. it could be due to one of the following reasons: moved up the list. press the SONG LIST button.

rear seat passengers may listen to a cassette tape through headphones while the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers. Primary Radio Controls The following functions are controlled by the RSA The following function is controlled by the knob on the system buttons: main radio: PWR (Power): Press this button to turn RSA on or off. the RSA will play the same remote source. You may operate the RSA functions even when the main radio is off. If the front seat passengers switch the source for the main radio to a remote source. cassette tapes and CDs. PWR (Power): Push this knob twice to turn RSA off. through the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) controller. For example. Be aware that the front seat audio controls always have priority over the RSA controls. The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each set of headphones. the rear seat passengers can only control the music sources that the front seat passengers are not listening to.Rear Seat Audio (RSA) (If Equipped) Rear Seat Audio Controls This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and control any of the music sources: AM-FM. 3-62 . However. The rear speakers will be muted when the RSA power is turned on.

VOL (Volume): Press this knob lightly so it extends. The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening. SEEK : While listening to AM FM. The SEEK and FM2. press the right arrow to hear the next selection on the tape. The sound will mute while seeking. Press AM FM to return to listening to the radio when a cassette tape or CD is playing. The SCAN function is inactive if the AM FM mode on the front radio is in use. The station. front radio is in use. press the right To scan stations. bands and cannot change the frequency. The SEEK button is inactive if the CD The left knob controls the left headphone and the right mode (if equipped) on the front radio or the CD changer knob controls the right headphone. press the right arrow to hear the Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume and next track on the CD. 3-63 . is in use. the RSA controller will not switch between the in use. then go on to the next SEEK button is inactive if the AM FM mode on the station. FM1 arrow to go back to the previous selection. Press the left arrow to go back to counterclockwise to decrease volume. Push the knob the start of the current track (if more than eight seconds back into its stored position when you’re not using it. play for a few seconds. Press the left AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM. press and hold either SEEK arrow until or left arrow to seek to the next or previous station and the radio goes into SCAN mode. Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning. While listening to a CD. If the front passengers are already listening to button is inactive if the tape mode on the front radio is AM FM. While listening to a cassette tape. have played). The radio will go to a stay there.

SET PROG (Preset Program): The front passengers Remote Cassette Tape Player (If Equipped) must be listening to something different for each of these functions to work: D Press this button to scan through the preset radio stations set on the pushbuttons on the main radio. press this of the center console. If your vehicle has this feature it is located in the front D When a CD is playing in the CD changer. Tapes a tape or CD and console-mounted CD changer if longer than that are so thin they may not work well in loaded. then go on to the next preset station. inside the radio for future listening. Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that TAPE CD: Press this button to switch between playing are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side.P. Press this button again to stop scanning. 3-64 . The radio will go to a preset station. button to select the next disc. play for a few seconds. D When a cassette tape is playing. The inactive tape or CD will remain safely this player. press this button to go to the other side of the tape.

The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is 5 : Press this pushbutton to turn Dolby NR on and metal or CrO2 and adjusts for best playback sound. FADE. AUTO TONE. station during reverse operation. Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license Primary Radio Controls from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. first press 3 NEXT: Press this pushbutton or the right SEEK arrow EJECT on the remote player. The radio plays the last selected station during for the player to stop at the beginning of the selection. 1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton or the left FWD 6 (Forward): Press this pushbutton to rapidly SEEK arrow (in the opposite direction that the lighted advance the tape. forward operation. Then. A minimum three-second blank gap is needed again. insert the cassette (in the direction that the lighted tape direction arrow tape. 3-65 . The tape will rapidly advance to the tape direction arrow points) to search for the previous end of the cassette or until you press this pushbutton selection. VOL. BAL. A lighted beginning of the cassette or until you press this arrow will also appear and show the direction of play pushbutton again. the top side is remote cassette. off. A lighted tape symbol reverse the tape. Dolby NR is active when a tape is inserted in the Anytime a cassette tape is inserted.To load a cassette tape with the ignition off. The tape will play if the ignition is on but the radio points) to search for the next selection. use the control knobs for the sound is muted in this mode. The radio plays the last selected D when a tape is active. The tape will rapidly reverse to the shows when a cassette tape is in the player. Dolby The following functions are controlled by the and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby main radio: Laboratories Licensing Corporation. The double-D symbol will appear on selected for play first. The tape direction arrow will blink during the SEEK operation and the sound is muted in this mode. the display. BASS and TREB REV 4 (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to rapidly just as you do for the radio. The tape is off. direction arrow will blink during SEEK operation and Once the tape is playing.

The inactive tape will remain (If Equipped) in the player. EJECT can be used with either the compact disc changer.AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio Console-Mounted CD Changer when a tape is playing. front console just below the climate control system and accessory power outlets. Normal size discs may be played using the slots supplied in the magazine. 3-66 . ignition or radio off. you can play up to six discs continuously. EJECT: Press this button on the remote player to If your vehicle is equipped with the console-mounted remove the tape. Also. you must press EJECT before Some vehicles may have this feature mounted in the loading a cassette with the radio off to allow loading. With the compact disc changer. Remote Cassette Tape Player Controls The following functions are controlled by the remote cassette tape player: PROG (Program): Press this button on the remote player to go from one side of the tape to the other. The lighted arrow will appear next to the symbol and show the direction of play when a tape is active. CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a tape when listening to the radio. it is located in the center console.

slide or push the You must first load the magazine with discs before you door open. a disc and track number will be displayed. Load the CDs from bottom to door closed whenever possible to keep dirt and dust top. If the CD changer is checking the magazine for CDs. Remember to keep the can play a compact disc. Close the door by sliding it all the way to the left (for the front console-mounted changer. Repeat this procedure for changer. the changer will begin checking for discs in the magazine. Push the magazine into the changer in the direction of the arrow marked on the magazine. slide the door to the right to open the compact disc changer (for the front console-mounted changer. The disc numbers are listed on the front of the magazine. placing the discs in the magazine label side up. push the door to the right and it will open automatically). When a CD begins playing. radio display. 3-67 . This will continue for up to one and a half minutes. push the door to the left and it will close automatically). If from getting inside the changer. you load a disc label side down. When the CD magazine is loaded. the CD changer symbol will appear on the loading up to six discs in the magazine. then press EJECT. Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine. the disc will not play Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in the and an error will occur. depending on the number of discs loaded. To eject the magazine from the player. the CD symbol will flash on the display until the changer is ready to play.

rather than sequential. order. except for to reverse quickly through a track. The disc number and track number will be displayed. Press this button seconds. Release it to If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with resume playing. resume playing. play a compact disc. sound will mute while seeking. The sound will mute while seeking. all of the CD changer REV 4 (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton functions are controlled by the radio buttons. Press the left SEEk arrow to ejecting the CD magazine. TAPE AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button if you have a 2 PROG (Program): Press this pushbutton to select a disc loaded in the changer and the radio is turned on. playing a tape and console-mounted CD changer if both If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once. Compact Disc Player (Bose). go to the previous track on the CD. The compact disc is playing. The sound will mute 1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the while seeking. the player will continue moving forward through the If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with disc. Press this button to switch between 3 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.If an error appears on the display. except for the next track on the CD. If this pushbutton is pressed and tracks in random. all of the CD changer SEEK : Press the right SEEK arrow to go to functions are controlled by the radio buttons.SCAN (Preset Scan): Press this button to hear the less than eight seconds. it will go to the beginning of the current track. Release it to ejecting the CD magazine. are loaded. to advance quickly through a track. previous track if the current track has been playing for P. the current track has been playing for more than eight RANDOM will appear on the display. to disc. 3-68 . Cassette Tape Player (Bose). see “Compact Disc FWD 6 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton Messages” later in this section. the AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a player will continue moving back through the disc. again to turn off random play. If you hold or press this pushbutton more than once.

REV 4 (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to reverse quickly through a track. The sound will mute 2 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the while seeking. compact disc is playing. If you hold or press this pushbutton more than once. next track on the CD. The disc previous track if the current track has been playing for number and track number will be displayed. Release it to resume playing. If this pushbutton is pressed and FWD 6 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton the current track has been playing for more than eight to advance quickly through a track. RANDOM will appear on the display. Press this button to switch between disc. the player will continue moving back through the disc. it will go to the beginning of the current track. 3-69 . disc loaded in the changer and the radio is turned on.1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the 5: Press this pushbutton to select a disc. Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the previous track on the CD. 3 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track. Press this AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a pushbutton again to turn off random play. playing a compact disc and the console-mounted CD changer if both are loaded. rather than sequential. Release it to seconds. CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button if you have a If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once. The SEEK : Press the right SEEK arrow to go the sound will mute while seeking. The sound will mute while seeking. to the player will continue moving forward through the play a compact disc. resume playing. less than eight seconds. order. tracks in random.

It works by using a secret code to disable all radio D You are driving on a very rough road.Compact Disc Changer Errors Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped) ERR (Error): If this message appears on the display. scratched or wet. the system plays normally and the radio is not protected by the feature. your radio will not operate if stolen. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected. it THEFTLOCKR is designed to discourage theft of your could be for one of the following reasons: radio. should play when the road gets smoother. If your battery loses power for any reason. D It is very humid.) LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery D The disc player is very hot. Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display. you must unlock the radio with the secret D The CD changer door is open. (If so. If ignored. ignored. If THEFTLOCK is D It is dirty. 3-70 . contact your dealer. Try the magazine again with a disc loaded on one of the trays. Completely close the code before it will operate. power has been interrupted. the radio will display try again. changer door to restore normal operation.) The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or D A disc is upside down. wait about an hour and When THEFTLOCK is activated. (The disc functions whenever battery power is removed. D An empty magazine is inserted in the CD changer. activated.

The instructions which follow explain how to enter your 6. Press AM FM and this time the display will show 2. you must start the procedure over at Step 4. Write down any three or four-digit number from need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your 000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from secret code. Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the any steps. Next you will use the secret code number which you have written down. recommended that you read through all nine steps 7. The display will show REP to let you know that you 1. The 3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN. 4.shows on the display. Press the 1 and 4 pushbuttons at the same time. the vehicle. the radio automatically reverts to time and code matches the secret code you have written down. Hold them down until --.Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature 5. It is with your code. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display. 3-71 . SEC to let you know that your radio is secure. Turn the radio off. If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between 8. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree before starting the procedure. with your code. LED indicator by the volume knob will begin flashing when the ignition is turned off. 9.

with your code. indicating the radio is now operable and secure. pause no more than Enter your secret code as follows. When you try again. contact your dealer. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display. 3-72 . 7. LOC will appear on the display. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree matches the secret code you have written down. You will have to wait an hour is no longer secured. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code. 4. 1. 5. pause no more than 15 seconds between steps: 15 seconds between steps: 1. Turn the ignition on. display will show SEC. INOP will The display will show ---. with your code. with the ignition on before you can try again. you will only have three chances to enter the correct code before INOP appears. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display. 2. 3. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree 5. Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code 6. indicating that the radio appear on the display. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree Hold them down until SEC shows on the display. If you lose or forget your code. The with your code. Press the 1 and 4 pushbuttons at the same time. 2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN. If you enter the wrong code eight times. 4. Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down. Turn the radio off.Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature Power Loss Enter your secret code as follows. 3.

disc is playing in the console-mounted CD changer (if equipped). selected band. Theft-Deterrent Feature RDS Radios (If Equipped) THEFTLOCKR is designed to discourage theft of your radio. SEC will appear on the Audio Steering Wheel Controls display. secured radio. PROG (Program): Press this button to go to a station When the radio and vehicle are turned off. the radio won’t turn on and LOC will appear on the display. If a cassette tape is playing. press this With THEFTLOCK activated. If your vehicle has this feature.If the code entered is incorrect. If the radio is moved to a different vehicle. 3-73 . To unlock a secured radio. The radio will remain secured until the correct (If Equipped) code is entered. your radio will not button to play the other side of the tape. see “Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in this section. you can control certain When battery power is removed and later applied to a radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel. The feature works automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). it will not operate and LOCKED or LOC will be displayed. press this button to go to the next available CD. the blinking you have programmed on the radio preset buttons on the red light indicates that THEFTLOCK is armed. If a compact operate if stolen.

the player will advance with the up arrow and reverse with the The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM. SEEK : Press the up or down arrow to seek to Understanding Radio Reception the next or previous radio station and stay there. but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Try Press it again to turn on the sound. however. VOL (Volume): Press the up or down arrow to increase or decrease volume. down arrow. 3-74 . up noise from things like storms and power lines. causing the sound to come and go. AM If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing. Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals. AM can pick MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. can cause stations to interfere with each other. FM Stereo FM stereo will give you the best sound. especially at night. reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it. The longer range.

Tips About Your Audio System Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable NOTICE: until it is too late. Sound that seems normal can be loud Before you add any sound equipment to your and harmful to your hearing. add what you want. CB radio. If you can. So. Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound. your vehicle’s engine. Delphi Electronics radio or 2. Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably other systems. check with your dealer and be sure to check federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units. before adding sound equipment. 3-75 . and even damage them.like a tape player. Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting. Your and clearly.be sure you can sound level before your hearing adapts to it. vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of 1. it’s very To help avoid hearing loss or damage do the following: important to do it properly. Take precautions by vehicle -. mobile adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe telephone or two-way radio -.

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player When cleaning the cassette tape player with the recommended non-abrasive cleaning cassette. 12344789). 3-76 . press and hold the REV and soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and FWD buttons at the same time for three seconds. it is A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause possible that the cassette may eject. The recommended cleaning method for your cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action. Within five seconds. It will still play tapes. resetting the tape clean timer. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s recommended cleaning time. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY. player at fault. they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player. The player. The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealer (GM Part No. your cassette tape player needs to be 3. To prevent the cleaning cassette from being cases away from contaminants. non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. use the following steps. because the cut tape reduced sound quality. try a tape symbol will flash on the display. Cassette tapes should be stored in their broken tape. If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player do the following: Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 50 hours of use. If they aren’t. but you should clean it as 4. cleaned. that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without 2. direct sunlight and ejected. If you notice a reduction in sound quality. Turn the radio on. ruined cassettes or a damaged detection feature on your radio may recognize it as a mechanism. showing that known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape the cut tape detection feature is no longer active. Your radio may display CLN to indicate 1. clean the tape player. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette. extreme heat. 5. If this message appears on the display. If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality.

direct sunlight and extreme heat. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for reduced sound quality. your cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean remote cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause 3. Always make sure the cassette or the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player (Bose) tape is in good condition before you have your tape do the following: player serviced. Care of Your Remote Cassette Tape Player 2. they may not operate 4.If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality with Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control may degrade over time. non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub After you clean the player. It will the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not still play tapes. 1. The The recommended cleaning cassette is available through radio will display --. Turn the radio off. the broken CLN to indicate that you have used your remote cassette tape detection feature is active again. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s Your remote tape player should be cleaned regularly recommended cleaning time. your dealer (GM Part No. wet-type timer. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY. The tape symbol on the display mechanism. not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.to show the indicator was reset. If this message appears on the display. cases away from contaminants. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette. ruined cassettes or a damaged five seconds. press and hold the EJECT the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. If they aren’t. 5. dry-type cleaning cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action. after every 50 hours of use. cassette is not recommended. Cassette tapes should be stored in their will flash for two seconds. tape player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean You may also choose a non-scrubbing action. 12344789). properly or may cause failure of the tape player. but you should clean it as soon as eject on its own. Your radio may display When the cleaning cassette has been ejected. button for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The recommended cleaning method for your remote The use of a non-scrubbing action. 3-77 . A non-scrubbing action cleaner may possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player.

If the surface of a disc is soiled. edge of the hole and the outer edge. insert the cassette at Care of Your Compact Disc Player least three times to ensure thorough cleaning. Release both buttons when the radio slightly bent. wiping from the center to the edge. you should been reset. While still pressing the The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes RECALL button. 3-78 . replace it. lubricants internal to the CD mechanism. indicating that the CLN indicator has mast is badly bent. After you clean the remote cassette tape player. Insert the recommended cleaning cassette. due to 4. cassette tape player: Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling 1.When cleaning the cassette tape player with the Care of Your Compact Discs recommended non-abrasive cleaning cassette. you can straighten it out by hand. tighten by hand. If the mast should ever become cassette tape player. press the EJECT button on the remote without being damaged. and dust. Turn the radio on. If the displays ---. If the cleaning cassette ejects. because the cut tape Handle discs carefully. Eject the cleaning cassette if it does not eject on the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with its own. as it might be by vandals. soft cloth in a mild. it is possible that the cassette may eject. neutral detergent solution and Use the following procedure to clean your remote clean it. 3. dampen a clean. Store them in their original cases detection feature on your radio may recognize it as a or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight broken tape. discs. then with a wrench one quarter turn. Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still tightened to the fender. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the 2. If tightening is required. press Fixed Mast Antenna and hold the RECALL button on the radio until CLN appears on the radio display. The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised.

Section 4 Your Driving and the Road Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. the Road and Your Vehicle 4-30 Driving at Night 4-3 Defensive Driving 4-32 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 4-4 Drunken Driving 4-35 City Driving 4-7 Control of a Vehicle 4-36 Freeway Driving 4-7 Braking 4-37 Before Leaving on a Long Trip 4-10 Steering 4-38 Highway Hypnosis 4-12 Off-Road Recovery 4-38 Hill and Mountain Roads 4-13 Passing 4-40 Winter Driving 4-14 Loss of Control 4-43 Recreational Vehicle Towing 4-15 Off-Road Driving with Your 4-47 Loading Your Vehicle Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle 4-50 Towing a Trailer 4- 4-1 . We’ve also included many other useful tips on driving. 4-2 Your Driving.

should buckle up. truck or sport utility. Driver behavior. responsibility. sudden or abrupt turns and drunken or aggressive driving can help make trips safer and avoid Your Driving.passenger car. van. especially a rollover crash. See “Safety Belts” in the Index. Driver Behavior The single most important thing is this: everyone in the vehicle. including a rollover crash. and the vehicle’s design all affect how well a vehicle performs. the Road and the possibility of a crash. we’re taking on an important more safely. In fact. including the driver. In addition. most serious injuries and fatalities to unbelted occupants can be reduced or prevented by the use of safety belts. In a rollover crash. the driving environment. by far. But statistics show that the most important factor. avoiding excessive speed. 4-2 . is how we drive. Your Vehicle This section provides many useful tips to help you drive Whenever we drive. Knowing how these three factors work together can help you understand how your vehicle handles and what you can do to avoid many types of crashes. an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. This is true for any motor vehicle -.

or during other times where visibility or traction avoid a rollover crash in any type of vehicle. it means than other types of vehicles. Unfamiliar surroundings can also have hidden hazards. You never in similar situations. including may be limited (such as on curves. According to the U. This means that you accidents. 4-3 . Drive defensively. the road. would maneuver. Anticipate what they might characteristics like these give the driver a better view of do. To help you learn more about driving in Defensive Driving different conditions. like a car. but also give utility vehicles a higher center of Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of gravity than other types of vehicles. See “Safety Belts” in the Index. Yet they are common. Department of Transportation.Driving Environment But driver behavior factors are far more often the cause of a utility vehicle rollover than are environmental or You can also help avoid a rollover or other type of crash vehicle factors. at the environment in which you’ll be driving can help night. Please start with a very important safety device in your Vehicle Design vehicle: Buckle up.” utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate On city streets. Safe driver behavior and understanding by being prepared for driving in inclement weather. as well as The best advice anyone can give about driving is: other hints for driving in various weather conditions. slippery roads or utility vehicles. freeway. know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly. Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything. and off-road driving. this section contains information about city.” higher ground clearance and a narrower track or shorter wheelbase than passenger cars to make them more Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be capable for off-road driving.S. It’s the best defensive driving a vehicle with a lower center of gravity. hilly terrain). Allow enough shouldn’t expect a utility vehicle to handle the same way following distance. Be ready for their mistakes. Specific design careless and make mistakes. in both city and rural driving. Utility vehicles do have a “always expect the unexpected. rural roads or freeways.

These simple defensive driving There are good medical.000 annual motor the driving task. In most cases. 4-4 . It’s the number one contributor to drive. For persons under 21. here is some general information on Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to the problem.by some estimates. D The amount of food that is consumed before and Police records show that almost half of all motor during drinking vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. reading. or pull off the road in a safe place against the law in every U.choose never to drink alcohol. of alcohol. psychological and techniques could save your life. developmental reasons for these laws. state to drink alcohol. nearly half the adult proper defensive driving more difficult and can even population -. drive a vehicle: The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone D Judgment who is drinking depends upon four things: D Muscular Coordination D The amount of alcohol consumed D Vision D The drinker’s body weight D Attentiveness. In recent years. about 16. or reaching for something on the floor -. D The length of time it has taken the drinker to these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking consume the alcohol. Anything that distracts from the driving vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use task -. Drunken Driving The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then a national tragedy. claiming thousands of victims if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many every year. with more than 300. might think. Although it depends on each person and situation. with resulting injury.S. Ask a passenger to never drive after drinking. to do them yourself.makes Many adults -.such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call.Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on and driving. so they cause a collision. it’s help do things like this. But what if people do? How much is “too much” the highway death toll.000 people injured.

the limit is even lower. For example. 4-5 . states. a It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men.08 percent. The person would reach the BAC would be close to 0. if 180-lb.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one hour). In some other countries. as we’ve seen.04 percent. Since alcohol is carried in body water. sets the legal limit at 0.12 percent.05 percent in both France and Germany. There is a gender difference.According to the American Medical Association. Of course. this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks.06 percent. (45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey. The BAC will be over 0. For example. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0. A person who same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses consumes food just before or during drinking will have a of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces somewhat lower BAC level. too. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour. it is 0. it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks. and how quickly the person drinks them. and throughout Canada. gin or vodka. the person’s BAC of about 0. The law in an increasing number of U.S.

No amount of coffee or number of cold Your reflexes. 0.10 percent.collision if you drive after drinking.05 percent or above. A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.is in a crash. especially injuries to the brain. attentiveness and showers will speed that up. perceptions. 4-6 . Research shows that the driving skills of many people don’t know.or even take sudden action. Medical research shows that many people are impaired at a BAC approaching alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries 0. in one drink. as when a child darts into the street? fatal -. You can have a serious -.05 percent. at a CAUTION: level of 0. Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking.10 percent. the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater.05 percent. spinal cord or drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0. designate a driver who will not drink. At a BAC level of 0. Ride home in a cab.driver or passenger -.But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of There’s something else about drinking and driving that 0. All worse. heart. the chance is 25 times greater! The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. or if you’re with a group.15 percent.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision. A driver with a BAC level of is higher than if the person had not been drinking. What if there’s an emergency. a need to of alcohol. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the judgment can be affected by even a small amount right answer. that increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled 0. and that the effects are worse at night. This means that when anyone who has been Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision drinking -.

It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another. the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied. a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. They are the brakes. coordination and eyesight all play a part. tire tread. it’s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle. actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or gravel). of course. the steering and reaction time. But that’s only an average. All three systems have to do their work First. Sometimes. icy). dry. And.Control of a Vehicle Braking You have three systems that make your vehicle go where Braking action involves perception time and you want it to go. That could be a lot of distance in an emergency. the accelerator. That’s perception time. Age. Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important. at the places where the tires meet the road. alertness. physical condition. as when you’re driving on snow or ice. the condition of your brakes. you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. That’s reaction time. But even in 3/4 of a second. drugs and frustration. So do alcohol. the condition of the road (wet. 4-7 .

rather than keeping pace with traffic. is going on. 4-8 . Your brakes may not have time to cool between electronic braking system that will help prevent a hard stops. you will still have some power brake assist. If your engine warning light will stay on. brake If there’s a problem with the normally but don’t pump your brakes. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you braking skid.Avoid needless heavy braking. do a lot of heavy braking.heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking -. That means hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test better braking and longer brake life. Some people drive in Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) spurts -. If you keep pace with the When you start your engine and begin to drive away. If you do. This is normal. stops. If your engine ever stops while you’re driving. Once the power assist is System Warning Light” in used up. This is a Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal the Index. ABS is an advanced mistake. the anti-lock brake system. But See “Anti-Lock Brake you will use it when you brake. this pedal may get harder to push down. you will your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. traffic and allow realistic following distances. will be harder to push.

4-9 . The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could. Here’s what happens with ABS: A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. both rear wheels. You slam on the brakes and continue braking. an animal jumps out in front of you. Let’s say the road is wet and you’re driving safely. The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions. your computer keeps receiving updates on separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly. Suddenly. the computer will As you brake. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling. This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.

or you may notice some noise. inertia will keep is normal. even though you have A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on anti-lock brakes. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop.steering and acceleration -. Steering Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. the angle time. each of us is subject to Using Anti-Lock the same laws of physics when driving on curves. steering can help you more at which the curve is banked. the vehicle going in the same direction. Here’s why: Experienced driver or beginner. sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places. While you’re in a curve. If there’s no traction. you’ll understand this. The Don’t pump the brakes. speed is the one factor you can control. than even the very best braking.Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need Steering Tips to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. 4-10 . Power Steering Then you suddenly accelerate. If you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice. Just hold the brake pedal down traction of the tires against the road surface makes it firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You can lose control.have to do stops or the system is not functioning. Adding the it will take much more effort. If you get too close to the vehicle in Driving on Curves front of you. you can steer and brake at the same condition of your tires and the road surface. and your speed. Braking in Emergencies The traction you can get in a curve depends on the With anti-lock. you won’t have time to apply your brakes It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed. you can steer but their work where the tires meet the road. In many emergencies. You may feel the possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn brakes vibrate. Both control If you lose power steering assist because the engine systems -. the news happen on curves. if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. but this the front wheels.

avoid these problems by braking -. do it before you enter the curve. and then Emergencies” earlier in this section. the problem. It is better to accelerate gently into the straightaway. there isn’t room. You can favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower. Wait to these. Maintain a reasonable.What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the Steering in Emergencies accelerator pedal. the posted speeds are out from nowhere. See “Braking in accelerate until you are out of the curve. First apply your brakes. or a car suddenly pulls adjust your speed. Then steer around the problem. 4-11 .if you can stop If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a in time. Of course. For example. curve. and slow down. or a child darts out from between based on good weather and road conditions. steer the vehicle the way you want it to go.steering around wheels are straight ahead. while your front That’s the time for evasive action -. you come over a hill and Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should find a truck stopped in your lane. But sometimes you can’t. There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like curve. to the left or right depending on the space available. remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision. steady speed. Under less parked cars and stops right in front of you.

if there is nothing in the way. recovery should be fairly easy. But you have to act fast. steer quickly. right front tire contacts the pavement edge. pavement. Off-Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions. 4-12 . An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. steer so The fact that such emergency situations are always that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until the all times and wear safety belts properly. and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the avoided the object. Ease off the accelerator and then. Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

pavement markings and lines. two-lane highway waits for just the right moment. especially if you’re following a larger vehicle. wait for a better time. 4-13 . to the sides and to you need only slow down and drop back again and crossroads for situations that might affect your passing wait for another opportunity. If the way is clear to pass. Time your move so you will be judgment.the head-on collision. accelerates.” Look down the road. pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle. And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass.Passing D Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. moves around the vehicle ahead. since the D When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up. A simple maneuver? ahead suddenly slows or stops. even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic. or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can increasing speed as the time comes to move into the suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the other lane. then goes Also. highway is a potentially dangerous move. center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear). wait your turn. The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a following too closely reduces your area of vision. you will have a worst of all traffic accidents -. you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle back into the right lane again. D If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle. If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a Remember to glance over your shoulder and check turn or an intersection. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass. passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t traffic for several seconds. delay your pass. But take care that someone isn’t trying to D Watch for traffic signs. D “Drive ahead. “running start” that more than makes up for the So here are some tips for passing: distance you would lose by dropping back. an error in get too close. Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line. A miscalculation. A broken the blind spot. Keep back a Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane reasonable distance. patterns. For one thing.

Perhaps you can ease a little to the right. always possible. three control systems. a driver can lose control of the vehicle. D Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time Skidding on two-lane roads. But skids are be slowing down or starting to turn. your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you In any emergency. make it easy for the The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s following driver to get ahead of you. Keep trying to just passed may seem to be farther away from you steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of than it really is. 4-14 . don’t give up. D Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. When you are far enough Let’s review what driving experts say about what ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your happens when the three control systems (brakes. too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. In a skid. Reconsider before passing the next vehicle. glance over your shoulder and Loss of Control start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. In the steering or cornering skid. In the braking skid. too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. your wheels aren’t rolling. and by not “overdriving” those conditions. (Remember that tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked. it may care suited to existing conditions. steering inside mirror. Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable Even though the brake lamps are not flashing.) less danger. And in the acceleration skid. activate your right lane change signal and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the and move back into the right lane.D Check your mirrors. D If you’re being passed.

your four-wheel drive. you’ve gone right back to nature. If you start steering quickly enough. see “Anti-Lock Brakes” in the Index. Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid. you Of course. acceleration or American road system behind. Traffic lanes aren’t braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower marked.and slow find many driving tips and suggestions. gear). vehicle may straighten out. The greatest of these vehicle control more limited. Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle If your vehicle starts to slide. If your vehicle doesn’t have four-wheel drive. These will help down when you have any doubt. uphill or downhill. is the terrain itself. Always be ready for a Also. ice. gravel or other material is on the road. Surfaces can be slippery. shouldn’t drive off-road unless you’re on a level. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. second skid if it occurs. Learn to recognize warning Off-road driving involves some new skills.such as enough water. ice or packed snow on why it’s very important that you read this guide. make your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable. While driving on a surface with reduced traction. It is important to slow down on slippery Off-road driving can be great fun. And that’s clues -. snow. 4-15 . ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the This off-road guide is for vehicles that have vehicle to go.A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best Off-Road Driving with Your handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. But it does surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and have some definite hazards. You’ll the road to make a “mirrored surface” -. traction is reduced when water. you’ll solid surface. For safety. vehicle is skidding. try “Off-roading” means you’ve left the great North your best to avoid sudden steering. Curves aren’t banked. In You may not realize the surface is slippery until your short. There are no road signs. rough.

See “Vehicle Loading.Before You Go Off-Roading There are some things to do before you go out. not on the roof. and low as possible.” “Luggage Carrier” and “Tires” in the Index. Be sure you read all the information about during a sudden stop. CAUTION: For example. making it more likely to There are some important things to remember about roll over. Secure the necessary permission. you should check with law tossed about when driving over rough enforcement people in the area. You’ll find other important information in this manual. 4-16 . Put heavy D The heaviest things should be on the load floor and loads inside the cargo area. You or your your four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. laws that apply to off-roading where you’ll be driving? D Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be If you don’t know. You can be seriously or fatally how to load your vehicle. forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward forward as you can. Keep cargo enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels up where they should be? What are the local below the top of the seatbacks. Check to make sure all D Cargo on the load floor piled higher than underbody shields (if so equipped) are properly the seatbacks can be thrown forward attached. Will you be on terrain. D Be sure the load is secured properly. injured if the vehicle rolls over. cargo properly. be sure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done. D Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving center of gravity. Is there passengers could be injured. be sure to get the struck by flying objects. so driving on the off-road terrain doesn’t toss things around. You or your passengers can be someone’s private land? If so.

Try to learn of any protecting the environment: blocked or closed roads. especially when going recreation. trees. D Avoid any driving practice that could damage the Does your vehicle have a winch? If so. concerns. In a remote area. D Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system. However. D Always use established trails. be sure to read environment -. obey all posted regulations.or the winch instructions. GM recognizes these concerns and urges You are much less likely to get bad surprises. If something happens to one of them. Get every off-roader to follow these basic rules for accurate maps of trails and terrain. . But you’ll want to know how to breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through use it properly. grasses -.Environmental Concerns Traveling to Remote Areas Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying It makes sense to plan your trip. roads and areas that It’s also a good idea to travel with at least one other have been specially set aside for public off-road vehicle. Know the terrain and plan your route. handy if you get stuck.shrubs. streams or over soft ground). the other recreational driving. . D Always carry a litter bag . make sure all refuse is removed from any campsite before leaving. a winch can be disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning. camp stoves and lanterns. 4-17 . can help quickly. flowers. D Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted). it also raises environmental to a remote area.

Here’s what we mean. At higher speeds: Off-road driving does require some new and different driving skills. for example. you and your passengers should wear safety belts. whether you’re driving on or off the road. One of the best ways to control your It’s a good idea to practice in an area that’s safe and vehicle is to control your speed. for unexpected obstacles. So. over obstacles. you’ll need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce. Your ears need to listen for D you have more vehicle bounce when you drive unusual tire or engine sounds.Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road driving. With your arms. especially since you’re on an unpaved surface. feet and body. D you approach things faster and you have less time to scan the terrain for obstacles. D you’ll need more distance for braking. Your eyes. This could cause you to lose control and crash. CAUTION: When you’re driving off-road. hands. bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position. need to constantly sweep the terrain D you have less time to react. Here are some things to close to home before you go into the wilderness. 4-18 . keep in mind. Tune your senses to different kinds of signals.

Scanning the Terrain When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain. many different features. even hard-packed dirt.) and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. A rock. well or at all. you can’t control the vehicle as snow or ice. sand. rut or bump can startle There are no road signs. you may experience slipping. Unseen or hidden obstacles can alertness from driving on paved roads and highways. sliding. You need to be familiar with the terrain and its you’re not prepared. or other obstacles. poor traction and sudden turns or sudden braking. acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different ways. See “Drunken Driving” in the Index. rocks. off-road driving requires a different kind of Surface Obstacles. You have to use your own good judgment about obstacles are hidden by grass. Ruts. Here are some things to consider. the rise and fall of the terrain itself. longer braking distances. rocks. spinning. delayed acceleration. gravel. Off-roading can take you over your wheels can leave the ground. Depending upon the kind of surface you are Because you will be on an unpaved surface. keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. snow or even what is safe and what isn’t. mud.accident if you drink more discussion of these subjects later. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. with one or two wheels. perceptions and judgment can be D Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead? affected by even a small amount of alcohol. hole. If this happens. When you drive over bumps. Here are some Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any things to consider: road. D Is the path ahead clear? At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills.or even fatal -. your reflexes. Each of these surfaces affects the steering. posted speed limits or signal you if you’re not prepared for them. be hazardous. troughs or other Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if of terrain. D Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly? 4-19 . grass. Often these lights. In a way. log. bushes. wheel especially important to avoid sudden acceleration. it’s on. You could D Does the travel take you uphill or downhill? (There’s have a serious -. Surface Conditions.

the incline may get steeper as you near the top. If you drive won’t have to make turning maneuvers? down them. If you D Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your drive across them. a drop-off. On a very small hill. cross. gullies. there may be a smooth. troughs and exposed rocks because they of those hills that’s just too steep to climb. It’s the smart way to find out. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what your vehicle can and can’t do. you will stall. down or across a hill is hidden by bushes. you need to decide if it’s one ruts. you can’t control your speed. don’t drive the hill. trees. D Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you If you drive up them. grass or shrubs. descend or are more susceptible to the effects of erosion. Here are some other things to consider as you approach There are some hills that simply can’t be driven. hill. If you have any doubt D What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff. you will roll over. an about the steepness. You could be path (boulders. no a hill. constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top. a fence? Get out and walk the hill if you don’t know. embankment. for example.Driving on Off-Road Hills On a large hill. 4-20 . Steepness can be hard to judge. matter how well built the vehicle. logs or ruts)? seriously injured or killed. Approaching a Hill D Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have When you approach a hill. or does the hill get sharply steeper in places? CAUTION: D Is there good traction on the hillside. or will the surface cause tire slipping? Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle. but you may not see this because the crest of the Off-road driving often takes you up. D Is there a constant incline.

They make because you don’t want your wheels to start spinning you more visible to oncoming traffic.Driving Uphill D Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of the hill. slide sideways. and possibly roll over. D Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel. You could be seriously injured or killed. CAUTION: embankment. When driving up hills. cliff. 4-21 . Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed can cause an accident. D Use your headlamps even during the day. or even another vehicle. Don’t use more power than you need. D Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills. always try to go straight up. D Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you’re there. As you near Turning or driving across steep hills can be the top of a hill. you might want to find CAUTION: another route. If the path twists and turns. or sliding. you need to take some special steps. You could lose traction. You could be seriously injured or killed. slow down and stay alert. D Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain your speed. There could be a drop-off. dangerous. D Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill.

4-22 . Then shift to REVERSE (R). or are about to stall. if you have a manual transmission) to “rev-up” the engine and D If your engine has stopped running. apply the parking brake. and D Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R). D If your engine is still running. back down the hill with your wheels straight rather First.Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls. NEUTRAL (N) (or pressing the clutch. it’s steep enough to cause you to roll over if you turn around. It’s best that you do. or is about D As you are backing down the hill. shift the transmission to REVERSE (R). and there are some things you must not do. when going up a hill. and I can’t make it up the hill? on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. Your restart it. here’s what you should do: than in the left or right direction. D Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a hill. in REVERSE (R). Here are some things you must not do if you stall. Instead. Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility D Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep of a rollover. and slowly back straight down. apply the parking brake. release and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible the parking brake. shift the transmission to could go out of control. If the hill is steep enough to stall your vehicle. you’ll be able to tell if your wheels are straight A: If this happens. you’ll need to regain forward momentum. If you can’t make it up the hill. it from rolling backwards. Also. put your left hand to stall. shift to neutral if your vehicle has a manual transmission) and restart the engine. PARK (P) (or. This way. Shift to REVERSE (R). With the brake pedal pressed and the vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you parking brake still applied. release the parking brake. This won’t work. there are some things you should and maneuver as you back down. you must back straight down the hill. Then. release the parking brake. apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle.

I try to back down the hill and decide I just can’t do it. Exit on the uphill transmission. CAUTION: What should I do? A: Set the parking brake. after stalling. If you are going to leave Leave it in some gear. 4-23 . Leave the transfer case in a drive gear.Q: Suppose. You or someone case to NEUTRAL when you leave the vehicle. else could be injured. But do not shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. This is side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would because the NEUTRAL position on the transfer take if it rolled downhill. your vehicle. even if you’re in gear). if you have the manual vehicle and go get some help. put your transmission in Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can PARK (P) (or the manual transmission in cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission FIRST (1)) and turn off the engine. set the parking brake and shift the transmission to PARK (P) (or. Leave the is in PARK (P) (or. put your manual transmission in FIRST (1)). Do not shift the transfer case overrides the transmission.

Driving Downhill When off-roading takes you downhill. This could cause loss of control and a serious accident. and use a low gear. 4-24 . Descend slowly. This way. then try to keep your vehicle headed straight down. D What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel? Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed D Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? under control. keeping your vehicle under control at all times. you’ll want to CAUTION: consider a number of things: D How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause vehicle control? your brakes to overheat and fade. Logs? Boulders? D What’s at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks? If you decide you can go down a hill safely. engine drag can help your brakes and they won’t have to do all the work.

You could roll over if you don’t drive straight down. “free-wheeling. D Never go downhill with the transmission in and drive straight down. A hill that’s not too transmission) and. D Shift back to a low gear. release the parking brake. This is called D If the engine won’t start. ignore them you could lose control and have a serious accident. while still braking. D When driving downhill. get out and get help. here’s what to do. restart steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across. NEUTRAL (N).” Your brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade. the engine.Q: Are there some things I should not do when Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill? driving down a hill? A: It’s much more likely to happen going uphill. But if A: Yes! These are important because if you it happens going downhill. Apply the parking brake. D Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes. avoid turns that take you D Shift to PARK (P) (or to neutral with the manual across the incline of the hill. or with the clutch pedal pressed down in a manual shift. 4-25 .

If you drive across a rock with Sooner or later. an off-road trail will probably go across the uphill wheels. If the vehicle slips sideways. you have to decide a rut or depression. If you have any doubt D Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive about the steepness of the incline. Just because D A hill that can be driven straight up or down may the trail goes across the incline doesn’t mean you be too steep to drive across. make your vehicle roll over. etc. don’t drive across a hill. Also. or if the downhill wheels drop into the incline of a hill.) and roll over. Here are some things to consider: For reasons like these. it can hit something that will trip it (a rock. your vehicle can tilt even more. 4-26 . Loose gravel. distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels) reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end. But when you drive across an incline. The last vehicle to try it might have up or down a hill. the length of the wheel base (the rolled over. If this happens. When you go straight have to drive it. the much more narrow track width (the distance between CAUTION: the left and right wheels) may not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over. grass can cause your tires to slip sideways. a rut. seriously injured or killed. You could be This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover. whether to try to drive across the incline. Find another route instead. muddy spots. you need to decide carefully whether to try to drive across an incline.Driving Across an Incline D Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse. or even wet across it. driving across an Driving across an incline that’s too steep will incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels. downhill.

CAUTION: Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous. even if the door there is harder to open. If the vehicle rolls over. but I hit some loose gravel and start to slide downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping. be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill side. you could be crushed or killed. turn downhill. Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path. a much better way to prevent this is to get out and “walk the course” so you know what the surface is like before you drive it. If you have to walk down the slope. 4-27 . Stalling on an Incline If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossing an incline. What should I do? A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways. stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over. However. you’ll be right in its path.Q: What if I’m driving across an incline that’s not too steep. If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over.

the lower the gear. Your deeper the mud. Snow or Ice When you drive in mud. currents under It’s best to use a low gear when you’re in mud -. poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide out of control. This has Light rain causes no special off-road driving problems. it’s very easy to lose control. If it’s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs.you probably won’t get ice. In really deep mud. This will improve traction. axles or On these surfaces. Drive your vehicle get stuck. vehicle could fall through the ice and you and the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don’t your passengers could drown. snow or sand.the the ice. But it will depend upon how loosely packed the sand is. You may But heavy rain can mean flash flooding. turning is more difficult. You can’t accelerate as quickly. when driving on sand. And if you do get moving.Driving in Mud. and flood want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly waters demand extreme caution. on safe surfaces only. Sand. Find out how deep the water is before you drive through Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction. or sudden thaws can weaken the ice. for example. the traction is so poor that you will through. and you’ll need longer Driving on frozen lakes. On loosely packed sand (as on beaches or sand Driving in Water dunes) your tires will tend to sink into the sand. an effect on steering. don’t try it -. 4-28 . Underwater springs. dangerous. accelerating and braking. and other vehicle parts. When you drive on sand. On wet exhaust pipe. it. Also. you’ll sense a change in wheel traction. ponds or rivers can be braking distances. water that deep can damage your axle have difficulty accelerating. your wheels CAUTION: won’t get good traction.

Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to Driving through rushing water can be dangerous. Also.If the water isn’t too deep. water splashes on your ignition system and your vehicle can stall. have the brake linings that when your brakes get wet. These your tailpipe is under water. off-road use. 4-29 . check the fuel lines and cooling CAUTION: system for any leakage. glazing and uneven braking. steering. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream additional information. See “Driving Through Water” in the Index for more information on driving through water. If it’s only shallow water. Don’t drive through rushing water. remember After operation in mud or sand. as long as underbody. Check the body structure. After Off-Road Driving At fast speeds. When you go through water. Stalling can also occur if Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the you get your tailpipe under water. it can still wash away the ground from under your tires. These substances can cause to stop. tires and exhaust system for damage. and you and your passengers could drown. suspension. And. and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over. you’ll never be able to start accumulations can be a fire hazard. wheels. your engine. chassis or under the hood. then drive through it slowly. it may take you longer cleaned and checked.

by alcohol or drugs. D Don’t drink and drive. or by fatigue. No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. watch for animals. But as Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. we get older these differences increase. D If you’re tired. D Drive defensively.Driving at Night Here are some tips on night driving. with night vision same thing at night as a 20-year-old. D Except Vehicles with Electrochromic Day/Night Inside Rearview Mirror: Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you. A 50-year-old One reason is that some drivers are likely to be driver may require at least twice as much light to see the impaired -. D Slow down. D Since you can’t see as well. Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead. you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles. especially on higher speed roads. D In remote areas. 4-30 . pull off the road in a safe place and rest. problems.

don’t wear sunglasses at night. if you spend the day in bright clean -. so should your eyes doesn’t lower the high beams.inside and out. that way. slow down a little. Glare at night is made much sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. aren’t even aware of it. Just as your headlamps should be are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who checked regularly for proper aim. Avoid staring blindness -. When you lighted objects. of things invisible. Even the inside of the glass have less trouble adjusting to night. It can take a second or two. Keep your headlamps. Your eyes will worse by dirt on the glass. or a vehicle with be examined regularly. 4-31 . For example. or even several eyes moving. down on glare from headlamps. But if you’re can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes driving. They may cut lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would. it’s easier to pick out dimly seconds.What you do in the daytime can also affect your night Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle vision. Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a You can be temporarily blinded by approaching roadway when you are in a turn or curve. but they also make a lot making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.and directly into the approaching headlamps. for your eyes to readjust to the dark. Some drivers suffer from night misaimed headlamps).the inability to see in dim light -.

The heavier the rain. It’s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield. pavement markings. if your tires don’t have much tread left.Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape. the edge of the road and even people walking. you’ll get even less traction. It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. the harder it is to see. a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals. accelerate or turn as well because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads. On a wet road. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement. you can’t stop. 4-32 . or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts. And.

try to slow down before you hit them. apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally. going through some car washes can cause problems. You could lose control of the vehicle. They won’t work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side. Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous. After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash. But if you can’t. Try to avoid puddles. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re going fast enough. 4-33 . too. CAUTION: Wet brakes can cause accidents. Driving too fast through large water puddles or even it has little or no contact with the road. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water. The water may affect your brakes. When your vehicle is hydroplaning.

As little as six inches of flowing Driving Through Deep Standing Water water can carry away a smaller vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room through them very slowly. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road. If this happens. And be especially careful when you pass can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water. Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. See “Tires” in the Index. D Have good tires with proper tread depth. your vehicle can be best advice is to slow down when it is raining. Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. carried away. Don’t ignore police warning signs. water can come in through your engine’s air intake and badly damage your Some Other Rainy Weather Tips engine. If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water. NOTICE: and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water. 4-34 . there could be hydroplaning. as you just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. drive another vehicle. and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray. you and the other vehicle occupants could drown. There If you try to drive through flowing water. If you distance.Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your Driving Through Flowing Water tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low. ahead. The might at a low water crossing. If you can see reflections from trees. and raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface. allow some extra following lower than the underbody of your vehicle. telephone CAUTION: poles or other vehicles. Never drive through water that is slightly D Besides slowing down.

Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross-country trip.” D Treat a green light as a warning signal. check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light. D Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. “Freeway Driving.City Driving Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving: D Know the best way to get to where you are going. One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. When a light turns green. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it. and just before you start to move. You’ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals. 4-35 . See the next part. You’ll save time and energy.

check your mirrors. do not.Freeway Driving At the entrance. stop and back up. But they have their own special rules. expressways. When you want to leave the freeway. parkways. make certain you allow a reasonable following distance. Drive on to up with traffic and keep to the right. adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Drive at the same the next exit. you should begin to check traffic. Switch on your turn signal. left lane on a freeway as a passing lane. 4-36 . move to the proper lane well in advance. sometimes quite sharply. check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep under any circumstances. If you miss your exit. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Just before you leave the lane. glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your “blind” spot. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass. Treat the The exit ramp can be curved. there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. Expect to move Mile for mile. Before changing lanes. speed most of the other drivers are driving. Then use your turn signal. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow. turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest of all roads. Once you are on the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp. slightly slower at night. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Once you are moving on the freeway. freeways (also called thruways.

After driving for any distance Are all windows clean inside and outside? at higher speeds. long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure? Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it serviced and maintained. it’s ready to go.such as after a day’s work -. If you D Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean? must start when you’re not fresh -. Is the tread good enough for can easily drive in. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you trouble-free trip. Here are some things you can check before a trip: Reduce your speed according to your speedometer. If it needs D Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook service. along your route? Should you delay your trip a short you’ll find experienced and able service experts in GM time to avoid a major storm system? dealerships all across North America.The exit speed is usually posted. D Fuel. you may tend to think you are going D Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape? slower than you actually are. They’ll be ready D Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps? and willing to help if you need it. have it done before starting out. Of course. Other Fluids: Have you checked Before Leaving on a Long Trip all levels? Make sure you’re ready. of the journey.don’t plan to make too many miles that first part D Tires: They are vitally important to a safe. not D Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? to your sense of motion. 4-37 . Engine Oil. Try to be well rested.

For safety. or whatever. There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery. What can you do about highway hypnosis? First. with a comfortably cool interior. and you could crash and be injured. 4-38 . lack of awareness. pull off the road into a rest. your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second. along with the hum of the tires on the road. treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency. or both. Then here are some tips: D Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated.Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis. Scan the road ahead and driving in flat or rolling terrain. the drone of the engine. service or parking area and take a nap. to the sides. get some exercise. D If you get sleepy. Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from D Keep your eyes moving. Don’t let it happen to you! If it does. be aware that it can happen. and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Check your mirrors and your instruments frequently.

Shift down to let D As you go over the top of a hill. D Know how to go uphill. cooling system and so hot that they wouldn’t work well. slowing down. See “Off-Road Driving” in the Index for information about driving off-road. Your brakes will have to D Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid do all the work of slowing down. Don’t swing wide or cut across the center of the road. then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. They could get levels and also the brakes. a falling rocks area or winding roads. here are some tips that can make CAUTION: your trips safer and more enjoyable. Be alert to these and take appropriate action. The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission. Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the ignition off is dangerous. There could be your engine assist your brakes on a steep something in your lane.If you drive regularly in steep country. These parts can work hard on then have poor braking or even none going down mountain roads. or if you’re planning to visit there. a hill. downhill slope. You would transmission. Drive at speeds that let so hot that they wouldn’t work well. CAUTION: D Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane If you don’t shift down. be alert. The most important running and your vehicle in gear when you thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the go downhill. Always have your engine D Know how to go down hills. You may want to shift down to a lower gear. like a stalled car or an accident. D You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems. passing or no-passing zones. You could crash. your brakes could get roads in hills or mountains. You would you stay in your own lane. Examples are long grades. tires. Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill. and you can climb the hill better. 4-39 . You could crash.

a supply of windshield washer fluid. a small shovel. And. D You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle. if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road. a rag. those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction. some winter outer clothing. Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time.Winter Driving Here are some tips for winter driving: D Have your vehicle in good shape for winter. if you will be driving under severe conditions. Include an ice scraper. a flashlight. 4-40 . you can have a very slippery situation. a red cloth and reflective warning triangles. You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be very careful. include a small bag of sand. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle. a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. However. a small brush or broom.

If you accelerate too fast.” Very cold clumps of trees. behind buildings or under bridges. Accelerate gently. blowing or loose snow -. can get there. Even though you have an anti-lock braking system. 4-41 . are on it. Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. and avoid sudden steering maneuvers. Try not to brake while you’re actually on Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews the ice. On an otherwise clear road. You can get wet ice when it’s about you see a patch of ice ahead of you. But wet Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. 0_C) and freezing rain begins to fall.drive with caution. packed. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index. ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice. snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. Whatever the condition -.smooth ice. the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more. D Watch for slippery spots. Try not to break the fragile traction. brake before you freezing (32_F. you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. If least traction of all. D Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.

but be careful. 4-42 .If You’re Caught in a Blizzard D Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you’ve been stopped by the snow. If you are stopped by heavy snow. Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe: D Turn on your hazard flashers. If you have no blankets or extra clothing. You can run the engine to keep warm. floor mats -. rags. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. burlap bags. you could be in a serious situation.anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm. make body insulators from newspapers. D Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.

That is. shut the engine off and close the window almost CAUTION: all the way to preserve the heat. Let the heater run for a while. CO could overcome you and kill every half hour or so until help comes. you can get This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises to get inside.” following. See “Dinghy fuel. Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. You will need a well-charged battery to restart the vehicle.such as behind a motorhome. make it go a little faster Towing” and “Dolly Towing. Clear away snow from Recreational Vehicle Towing around the base of your vehicle. Preserve the Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle. This saves vehicles can be towed in these ways. many Run your engine only as long as you must. With the proper preparation and equipment. and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps. as a “dolly”). Then. When you run the engine. towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly Open a window just a little on the side of the towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on vehicle that’s away from the wind. around again from time to time to be sure snow The two most common types of recreational vehicle doesn’t collect there. especially any Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle that is blocking your exhaust pipe. 4-43 . But do it as little as possible. you. so you might not know it is in your vehicle. fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm. This will help the ground and two wheels up on a device known keep CO out. You can’t see it or smell it. push the accelerator slightly. And check behind another vehicle -. than just idle. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.

it should be placed on a platform trailer with all four wheels off the ground. D Do you have the proper towing equipment? See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations. 4-44 . Your vehicle should not be towed with all four wheels on the ground. See “Before Leaving on a Long Trip” in the Index. you’ll want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be towed. Towing with all four wheels on the ground should be avoided. Your transmission has no provision for internal lubrication while being towed. To properly tow your vehicle.Here are some important things to consider before you Dinghy Towing (Two-Wheel Drive do recreational vehicle towing: Models Only) D What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s recommendations. D Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you would prepare your vehicle for a long trip. D How far will you tow? Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.

the recreational vehicle towing. Dust or dirt can enter the back of the transmission Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer through the opening created by removing the propeller case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to shaft if proper protection is not provided. marked and the propeller shaft removed following the applicable service manual removal/installation procedure. could be injured. Be sure to replace the fuse to NEUTRAL. A four-wheel-drive vehicle must be towed by flatbed. for a manual transmission. gear. turn the ignition to OFF. for an the transmission fluid level before driving the vehicle. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index. or if your vehicle is in When towing your vehicle. Make sure the parking brake remove the RDO BATT and CLSTR fuses from the is firmly set before you shift the transfer case instrument panel fuse block. You or others To prevent your battery from draining while towing. See “Service and Owner Publications” in CAUTION: the Index.In rare cases when it’s unavoidable and your vehicle Be sure to use the proper towing equipment designed for must be towed with all four wheels on the ground. automatic transmission. Follow the instructions for propeller shaft to axle yoke orientation should be the towing equipment. when you reach your destination. Also. check roll even if the transmission is in Park (P). 4-45 . If your vehicle has four-wheel-drive it cannot be dinghy towed.

Dolly Towing (Two-Wheel Drive In rare cases when it’s unavoidable and your vehicle Models Only) must be towed with all four wheels on the ground. Your vehicle should not be towed with all four wheels D Disconnect the propshaft as described above. four wheels on the ground should be avoided. To properly tow with a clamping device designed for towing. D Set the parking brake and then remove the key. 4-46 . Dust or dirt can enter the back of the transmission through the opening created by removing the propeller shaft if proper protection is not provided. D Put the vehicle in PARK (P). Also. Towing with all D Release the parking brake. it should be placed on a platform trailer with all four wheels off the ground. your vehicle. Use the following steps to dolly tow your vehicle: D Put the front wheels on a dolly. See “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. on the ground. check the transmission fluid level before driving the vehicle. Your transmission has no provision for D Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position internal lubrication while being towed. the propeller shaft to axle yoke orientation should be marked and the propeller shaft removed following the applicable service manual removal/installation procedure.

all occupants. fuel. 4-47 . obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. The label shows the size of towed. The Certification/Tire label is found on the driver’s door If your vehicle has four-wheel-drive it cannot be dolly edge. CAUTION: Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P). for an automatic transmission. Follow the instructions for the towing equipment. You or others could be injured. A four-wheel-drive vehicle must be towed your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to by flatbed. if pulling a trailer. or if your vehicle is in gear. above the door latch. This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). for a manual transmission. Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL. cargo and trailer tongue weight. The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle.Be sure to use the proper towing equipment designed for Loading Your Vehicle recreational vehicle towing.

like suitcases. 4-48 . If you do have a heavy load. Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs tools. overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. you should spread it out. you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle.The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum Using heavier suspension components to get added weights for the front and rear axles. Ask Weight Rating (GAWR). These could cause you to lose control and crash. CAUTION: Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR. components that fail because of overloading. they’ll keep going. If you put things inside your vehicle -. Also. To find out the actual loads on your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way. packages. and it can change the way your vehicle handles. or anything else -. parts on your vehicle can break. or the Your warranty does not cover parts or GAWR for either the front or rear axle. Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle.they will go as fast and payloads. your front and rear axles. Your dealer can help you with this. If you have to stop or turn quickly. If you do. Please note your vehicle’s Certification/Tire as the vehicle goes. or either the maximum front or rear GAWR. called Gross Axle durability might not change your weight ratings. label or consult your dealer for additional details. or if there is a crash. Be sure to spread out your load equally on NOTICE: both sides of the centerline.

limit on how many people you carry inside your vehicle. from the payload. There’s also important loading information for off-road driving in this manual. or in occupants as part of your load. Your dealer can help you with this. D When you carry something inside the vehicle. Your warranty doesn’t cover parts or components that fail because of overloading. the new equipment. See “Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving” in the Index. If you added any a crash. D Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy and install your vehicle. D Never stack heavier things. Try to spread the weight evenly. Add-On Equipment inside the vehicle so that some of them are When you carry removable items. remember to subtract the weight of these things D Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle. Payload CAUTION: The payload capacity is shown on the Certification/Tire label. Be sure to include the weight of the and injure people in a sudden stop or turn. you may need to put a above the tops of the seats. This is the maximum load capacity that your Things you put inside your vehicle can strike vehicle can carry. secure it whenever you can. 4-49 . D Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you NOTICE: need to. like suitcases. accessories or equipment after your vehicle left the factory.

But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling. and see your dealer for NOTICE: (Continued) 4-50 . if the trailer is too heavy. safe trailering takes correct equipment. To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the your vehicle. To pull a trailer correctly. Additional rear axle maintenance is required for a vehicle used to tow If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive a trailer. you can lose control when you pull a in the Index. You and your passengers could be seriously injured. follow before you pull a trailer. For example. your vehicle. So please read this section carefully your warranty.or even at all. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” properly. durability and fuel economy. Ask your dealer for advice “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section.Towing a Trailer NOTICE: (Continued) important information about towing a trailer CAUTION: with your vehicle. you should read the information in steps in this section. important trailering tips and safety rules. as many are. Successful. trailer. the brakes may not work well -. NOTICE: That’s the reason for this part. it’s ready for heavier trailers. and information about towing a trailer with If yours was built with trailering options. Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your Many of these are important for your safety and that of vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your passengers. and it has to be used properly. the advice in this part. In it are many time-tested.

not only where you live but Tow in DRIVE (D). 4-51 . don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle. it’s better not to use the highest gear. A good source for this transmission to THIRD (3) or. D the weight of the trailer tongue axle or other parts could be damaged. This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.g.If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer D If you have an automatic transmission. always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh See “Tow/Haul Mode” in the Index. during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer. You may want to shift the also where you’ll be driving. Operating your vehicle in D There are many different laws. more than 3. You should a trailer. as you need to. You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls. a lower gear) when If you do.. (1 589 kg) or less. Three important considerations have to do with weight: D Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles D the weight of the trailer. if necessary. D Then. Make sure buildup and extend the life of your transmission.500 lbs. under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions). (1 589 kg). Your engine.500 lbs. a lower information can be state or provincial police. (800 km) your new vehicle is driven. gear selection if the transmission shifts too often (e. including speed limit THIRD (3) when towing a trailer will minimize heat restrictions. If D Consider using a sway control if your trailer will you have a manual transmission and you are towing weigh 3. your rig will be legal. here are some important points: towing a trailer. you can use THIRD (3) (or. having to do with trailering. D and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.

The tow/haul mode should be used only See “Tow/Haul Mode Light” in the Index. a heavy trailer. The purpose of the tow/haul mode is: The tow/haul mode for hauling a heavy trailer is most D Reduce the frequency of shifts when pulling a useful under the following conditions: heavy trailer. but is on. The tow/haul when pulling a heavy trailer. trailer as when the vehicle is unloaded. D when driving in parking lots. 4-52 . a light located on the instrument panel cluster you may experience reduced fuel economy and will illuminate to indicate that the tow/haul mode has undesirable performance from the engine and been selected. When the feature heavy trailer will not cause damage to the vehicle. This feature is turned on or off by pressing a button Operating in the tow/haul mode when not pulling a on the floor console or the shift knob. and D when driving in low speed or stop and go traffic D reduce the need to change throttle position when below 55 mph (88 km/h). mode is automatically turned off each time the vehicle is started.Tow/Haul Mode (V6 Engine. and pulling a heavy trailer. transmission. Automatic The tow/haul mode is most effective when the vehicle Transmission Equipped Models) (If Equipped) and trailer combined weight is at least 75% of the Gross The tow/haul mode is a feature that assists when pulling Combination Weight Rating (GCWR). D When driving through hilly terrain at speeds below D provide the same shift feel when pulling a heavy 55 mph (88 km/h).

. And.500 lbs. . Trans. Two Door Auto. . based upon your vehicle model and options. (2 951 kg) Two-Wheel Drive. . . . . . (3 632 kg) Two-Wheel Drive. 3. 3.Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be? It depends on how you plan to use your rig. . .42 5. Two Door Xtreme Blazer Auto Trans. (2 951 kg) Two-Wheel Drive. . 3.400 lbs. (4 313 kg) 4-53 .500 lbs. (4 313 kg) 3.500 lbs. altitude. . . .000 lbs. . Trans.000 lbs.200 lbs. (2 451 kg) 9. .42 2. .73 5. . (2 497 kg) 9. . .500 lbs. . . (4 313 kg) Four-Wheel Drive. .42 5. Trailer Wt.000 lbs. . . Trans. . . . . . The following chart shows how much your trailer can weigh. . . (2 587 kg) 9.42 5. . . . . .42 4. . . . . (1 906 kg) 8. road grades. .500 lbs. . outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. . (2 451 kg) 9. . Two Door Manual Trans. . . 3. (4 313 kg) Two-Wheel Drive.400 lbs. .700 lbs. . . . . (908 kg) 6. For example. *GCWR Two-Wheel Drive. . speed. . . . .500 lbs. . (907 kg) 6. . Two-Door Xtreme Blazer Manual Trans. Four Door Auto.500 lbs. . Two Door Auto. Vehicle Axle Ratio Max. . 3.42 2. 3. . . . . . it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle. .

.73 4. Trailer Wt. Manual Trans.42 3. . . . (1 860 kg) 8. The weight of and trailer including any passengers.500 lbs. (4 313 kg) 3. . Trans. . . trailer weight.000 lbs. (4 086 kg) Auto. . 3. .000 lbs. . (1 770 kg) 8. . .42 5. 3.600 lbs. 3. . . (2 313 kg) 9. The weight of the trailer tongue also affects the maximum trailer weight.. (4 313 kg) Four-Wheel Drive. (2 313 kg) 9. . . . .500 lbs. .Vehicle Axle Ratio Max. cargo. equipment additional optional equipment. 3.000 lbs. 3. (3 632 kg) Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the * The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the driver and one passenger are in the tow vehicle and it total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle has all the required trailering equipment. (3 632 kg) ZR2 . . Trans. . . . . . . . .73 5. .900 lbs. 4-54 . . (2 087 kg) 9. . . .600 lbs.42 3. *GCWR Four-Wheel Drive. . . passengers and cargo in and conversions. .100 lbs. . Two Door Manual Trans. The GCWR for your vehicle should the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum not be exceeded. (3 632 kg) Four-Wheel Drive. (1 633 kg) 8. Four Door Auto.000 lbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 lbs.73 4.100 lbs. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this section. Four Door Manual Trans. . . . .

You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice. 4-55 . your vehicle’s maximum load capacity. any cargo you may carry in it. And if you will tow a trailer. Do not exceed the maximum Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about allowable tongue weight for your vehicle. In Canada. weigh the trailer and then the tongue. or you can write us at the address listed in your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet. See “Loading trailer weight (B). you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer. If they aren’t. too. 163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa. the trailer tongue weight (A) must add the tongue load to the GVW because your should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded vehicle will be carrying that weight. to see if the weights are proper. and the people who will be If you’re using a weight-carrying or a riding in the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle. After you’ve loaded your trailer. you weight-distributing hitch. separately. write to: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre. Ontario L1H 8P7 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle.

See “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index. weigh more than 3. This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when you’re driving. large trucks going by and rough roads are a Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. will weight of the trailer tongue.500 lbs. D Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do. (1 589 kg). when loaded. then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch. Dirt and water can. You’ll find these numbers on the Crosswinds.Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires Hitches Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment. If you don’t seal them. weight-distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size. deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your vehicle. be sure to use a properly mounted. 4-56 . Here are see “Tire Loading” in the Index. including the D If you’ll be pulling a trailer that. Then be sure you don’t some rules to follow: go over the GVW limit for your vehicle. too. limit for cold tires.

then it needs its own brakes -.000 lbs. Always leave just enough slack so you can D The trailer parts can withstand 3. 4-57 . You could even lose your brakes. Cross the safety chains under the tongue loaded. But don’t use copper tubing for this. If you do. then make the brake fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends fluid to the rear brakes. Use steel brake tubing. Your trailer’s brake system can tap into the vehicle’s Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for hydraulic brake system only if: attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s master cylinder.02 cubic inch (0. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. it will bend and finally break off. the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install.Safety Chains Trailer Brakes You should always attach chains between your vehicle If your trailer weighs more than 1. (450 kg) and your trailer. Never allow safety chains to drag on (20 650 kPa) of pressure.and they must be of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting adequate.000 psi turn with your rig. both braking systems won’t work well. the ground. adjust and Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the maintain them properly. Otherwise. If everything checks out this far. D The trailer’s brake system will use less than 0. hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.

carbon monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle. starting on your trip. To electric brakes. Acquaint yourself with the feel of CAUTION: handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. This lets you check your leaks. start your vehicle and trailer moving and maximize your safety when towing a trailer: then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure D Have your exhaust system inspected for the brakes are working. 4-58 . tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has death. or smell CO. you’ll want to get to know your rig. Before setting out for the open road. See “Comfort Controls” in the Index. electrical connector. pull a trailer with your vehicle. You can’t see Before you start. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index. safety chains. Do not use MAX A/C or RECIRCULATION because it only recirculates the air inside your vehicle. It can cause unconsciousness or lamps. and that the lamps and any trailer brakes D If exhaust does come into your vehicle are still working. During your trip. check occasionally to be sure that the D Keep the rear-most windows closed. check the trailer hitch and platform (and attachments).Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. outside air into your vehicle. This will bring fresh. load is secure. through a window in the rear or another opening. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as If you have a rear-most window open and you responsive as your vehicle is by itself. and make necessary repairs before electrical connection at the same time. drive with your front. main heating or cooling system on and with the fan on any speed.

Your vehicle could be damaged. Always back up slowly and. curbs. to move the trailer to the left. you’ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.Following Distance Making Turns Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. Do this so your trailer won’t Backing Up strike soft shoulders. To move the trailer to the right. road signs. if possible. Signal well Then. move your hand to the right. 4-59 . objects. trees or other Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. to the left. make wider turns than normal. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. just move that hand in advance. And. because you’re a good deal making very sharp turns while trailering. longer. have someone guide you. When you’re turning with a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking NOTICE: and sudden turns. Making very sharp turns while trailering could Passing cause the trailer to come in contact with the You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when vehicle. Avoid you’re towing a trailer.

and/or hilly conditions). If you turn are seeing your signal when they are not. Or. panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a are burned out. Thus. your vehicle may show signs still working. Properly to use FIFTH (5) gear. change lanes or stop. To avoid this. as you need to. Mode” in the Index. the arrows on your instrument When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades..Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer If you have an automatic transmission. see “Engine they would get hot and no longer work well. It’s important your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are on steep uphill grades. 4-60 . you might have to use your brakes so much that If you do get the overheat warning. telling other (or. you can tow in DRIVE (D). it’s better not whenever you signal a turn or lane change. a lower gear). if you have a manual The arrows on your instrument panel will flash transmission and you are towing a trailer. a lower gear selection if the wiring and a heavy-duty turn signal flasher (included in transmission shifts too often (e. See “Tow/Haul drivers you’re about to turn. your vehicle has to have extra THIRD (3) or. If you don’t shift applied) for a few minutes before turning the engine off. if necessary. the trailer lamps will also flash. When towing a trailer. similar to engine overheating. under heavy loads the optional trailering package). you may think drivers behind you lower temperature than at normal altitudes. let the engine run while parked (preferably on level ground) Driving On Grades with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) (or the Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start manual transmission out of gear and the parking brake down a long or steep downgrade. Just drive in FOURTH (4) gear hooked up.g. down. Overheating” in the Index. You may want to shift the transmission to When you tow a trailer.

See “Four-Wheel Drive (Automatic REVERSE (R) for a manual transmission. Transfer Case)” in the Index. So. your vehicle will be free to roll. release the in NEUTRAL. facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill. be 4.not in NEUTRAL.Parking on Hills 5. with a trailer attached.not in brake. use the steps PARK (P) yet. Then apply your parking sure the transfer case is in a drive gear -. your rig could start to move. but don’t shift into when you’re on fairly level ground. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. You or others could be injured. Apply your regular brakes. People can be injured. here’s If you have left the engine running. If the transfer case on four-wheel drive vehicles is 3. regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load. Reapply the regular brakes. be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear -. 4-61 . on a hill. even 1. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle with an automatic transfer case. the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. or NEUTRAL. To be sure your vehicle won’t move. 2. You really should not park your vehicle. When the wheel chocks are in place. the vehicle how to do it: can move suddenly. CAUTION: 6. or into gear for a manual transmission. If something goes CAUTION: wrong. Release the regular brakes. and then shift into PARK (P). and both your vehicle and the trailer It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if can be damaged. Your vehicle can roll. But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill. Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Then turn your wheels into the curb if that follow. even if your shift lever is in PARK (P).

4-62 . cooling D shift into a gear. See the Maintenance Schedule for while you: more on this. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts 4.When You Are Ready to Leave After Maintenance When Trailer Towing Parking on a Hill Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re 1. quickly. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. 3. Let up on the brake pedal. Each of these is covered in this manual. engine oil. axle lubricant. (don’t overfill). Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. and the Index will help you find them D release the parking brake. and system and brake system. belt. these sections before you start your trip. are tight. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid D start your engine. If you’re trailering. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down pulling a trailer. it’s a good idea to review 2.

Both harnesses have D Dark Green: Passenger’s side stoplamp and no connector and should be wired by a qualified turn signal. Wrap the harness together and tie it neatly so it won’t be damaged. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index. The technician can use the D White: Ground wire. but not so loose that it drags on the ground. engine compartment fuse block. vehicles.Trailer Wiring Harness D Dark Blue: Use for electric trailer brakes or auxiliary wiring (eight-wire harness only). The heavy-duty trailer wiring is fused in the D Yellow: Driver’s side stoplamp and turn signal. Securely attach the harness to the trailer. The light-duty trailer wiring is a six-wire harness assembly. along the passenger-side frame D Light Green: Back-up lamps. following color code chart when connecting the wiring harness to your trailer. Be sure you leave it loose enough so the wiring doesn’t bend or break. electrical technician. under the vehicle. The optional heavy-duty trailer wiring is an D Red: Use for battery charging. The harnesses are stored starter solenoid (eight-wire harness only). crossmember on two-door vehicles or on the driver’s side corner frame rear crossmember on four-door D Brown: Taillamps and parking lamps. then tape or strap it to your vehicle’s frame rail. it connects to the eight-wire harness assembly. D Light Blue: Auxiliary stoplamp. 4-63 . Store the harness in its original place.

Ice or Snow 5- 5-1 . Mud. 5-2 Hazard Warning Flashers 5-10 Cooling System 5-2 Other Warning Devices 5-18 Engine Fan Noise 5-3 Jump Starting 5-18 If a Tire Goes Flat 5-8 Towing Your Vehicle 5-19 Changing a Flat Tire 5-8 Engine Overheating 5-34 Spare Tire 5-35 If You’re Stuck: In Sand. Section 5 Problems on the Road Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.

Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. your turn Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. 5-2 .Hazard Warning Flashers The hazard warning flasher button is located on the top of the steering column. Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in. Press the button again to turn the flashers off. When the hazard warning flashers are on. The flashers will stop if you step on also let police know you have a problem. Your front and the brake. rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off. They signals won’t work. and even if the key isn’t in. Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles. you can set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.

some or all of these things can hurt you. The ACDelcoR battery in your vehicle has a CAUTION: built-in hydrometer. cranking complaint. and it could damage your vehicle. test or jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear Batteries can hurt you. Do not charge. Replace the battery when there dangerous because: is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a D They contain acid that can burn you. If you don’t follow these steps exactly. 5-3 . They can be or light yellow. to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. D They contain gas that can explode or ignite. Be sure to the follow the steps below to do Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage it safely.Jump Starting If your battery has run down. Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling D They contain enough electricity to it won’t work. burn you. you may want to use NOTICE: another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle.

both vehicles can be damaged. 4. 5-4 . it could be badly NOTICE: damaged. Put an automatic the battery. And it connection you don’t want. and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems. This will each other. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle. be sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N). NOTICE: If you leave your radio on. transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake. it could cause a ground avoid sparks and help save both batteries. 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system. Turn off the can reach. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching radio and all lamps that aren’t needed. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette 2. Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminal locations on To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling. If they are. See “Engine Compartment Overview” the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in in the Index for more information on location of the jump start procedure. Open the hoods and locate the batteries.1. You wouldn’t be able to could save your radio! start your vehicle. If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a negative ground. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables lighter or in the accessory power outlets. set each vehicle.

If they do. explosive gas positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if could be present. Be sure the battery has enough water. your eyes or on your skin. unpainted metal engine part or to a remote Don’t get it on you. Use a flashlight if once the engine is running. Keep your hands away from moving parts and some have been blinded. Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. And don’t connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks. The vehicles could be damaged too. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or missing insulation. you could get a shock. If you accidentally get it in negative (-) terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (-) will go to a heavy. get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too. If it is low. here are some basic amount of fluid is there. you need more light. add water to things you should know. badly. 5-5 . You don’t need to add water to the ACDelcoR battery 5. Positive (+) will go to take care of that first. be sure the right Before you connect the cables. If you don’t. But if a battery has filler caps. CAUTION: CAUTION: Using a match near a battery can cause battery Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this. flush the place with Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you’ll water and get medical help immediately. the vehicle has one. (or batteries) installed in every new GM vehicle.

7. positive (+) terminal if 9. has one. least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery. Now connect the black positive (+) cable to the negative (-) cable to the positive (+) terminal of negative (-) terminal of the dead battery. or to a remote negative (-) battery. Use a remote positive (+) remote negative (-) terminal if the vehicle terminal if the vehicle has one. Don’t let the other end Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next touch metal. 5-6 . but not near engine parts that move. and the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less. Connect the red 8. The other end of the negative (-) cable doesn’t to the positive (+) go to the dead battery. 6. Use a remote terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery. Connect it step. Use a the good battery. Connect the other end of the negative (-) cable at the vehicle has one. unpainted terminal of the good metal engine part. It goes to a heavy. The electrical connection is just as good there.

Good Battery C. 11. A. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for awhile. Unpainted Metal Engine Part B.10. If it won’t start after a few tries. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by Jumper Cable Removal your warranty. Heavy. To prevent electrical shorting. Dead Battery 5-7 . it probably needs service. take care that they don’t touch each other or any other metal. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. NOTICE: Damage to your vehicle may result from electrical shorting if jumper cables are removed incorrectly.

Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the vehicle with the good battery. 5-8 . 3. If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine do the following: 1. If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome). Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the vehicle with the good battery. 2. See “Gages” in the Index. Towing Your Vehicle Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” in the Index. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other vehicle. To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles. 4. Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle’s instrument panel.

The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. there is no sign of steam or coolant before you D Tow a trailer. the liquids in it can catch fire. 5-9 . from it. Stop your engine if it overheats. If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine CAUTION: If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam. your vehicle can be badly damaged. the problem may not be too serious. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan engine is cool. shift to the highest gear while driving -. See “Driving on Grades” in the Index. open the hood. If you have an air conditioner and it’s on. even if you just open the hood. 3. from the engine if you see or hear steam coming D Stop after high-speed driving. FIFTH (5) gear for NOTICE: manual transmissions. otherwise. speed and open the window as necessary. If you keep driving when your engine is try this for a minute or so: overheated. turn it off. Sometimes Steam from an overheated engine can burn you the engine can get a little too hot when you: badly. Wait until D Idle for long periods in traffic. and get out of the vehicle until the 2. If you’re in a traffic jam. If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant.DRIVE (D) or THIRD (3) for automatic transmissions. You or 1. Stay away D Climb a long hill on a hot day. If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam. others could be badly burned. shift to NEUTRAL (N).

you can Cooling System drive. If you still have the warning. Coolant Recovery Tank B. If there’s still no sign of steam. Engine Cooling Fan If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling.If you no longer have the overheat warning. you’ll see: If the warning continues. don’t do anything else until it cools down. If the warning doesn’t come back on. turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. A. and park your vehicle right away. You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away. The vehicle should be parked on a level surface. Just to be safe. drive slower for about 10 minutes. stop. Radiator Pressure Cap C. here’s what drive normally. 5-10 . pull over. you can When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood. push down the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while you’re parked. idle the engine for three minutes while you’re parked.

The engine cooling fan speed should increase when idle When the engine is cold. water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system. Don’t touch them. CAUTION: Heater and radiator hoses. start the engine again. you can be burned. the coolant level should be at speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal least up to the ADD mark. If you do. If it isn’t. 5-11 . your vehicle needs service. heater the engine. and you could be burned. hoses. Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. and other engine parts. it could lose all coolant. radiator. Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle. That could cause an engine fire. If you run the engine. you may have a down. If it doesn’t. Turn off leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses. can be very hot. If there seems to be no leak.

it is important that you use only DEX-COOLR (silicate-free) coolant. mixture. heater core or liquid such as alcohol. premature engine. or some other system. 5-12 . but the coolant level Engine damage from running your engine isn’t at the ADD mark. NOTICE: CAUTION: When adding coolant. In addition. drinkable water and DEX-COOLR engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. the coolant mixture will. drinkable water and DEX-COOLR coolant. How to Add Coolant to the Coolant NOTICE: Recovery Tank If you haven’t found a problem yet. Adding only plain water to your cooling system If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to the can be dangerous. add a 50/50 mixture of clean. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean.000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months. whichever occurs first. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more information. Damage caused by the your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t use of coolant other than DEX-COOLR is not get the overheat warning.at warning system is set for the proper coolant 30. With plain water or the wrong mixture. Plain water. without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty. Your vehicle’s coolant engine coolant will require change sooner -. can boil before the proper radiator corrosion may result. catch fire and you or others could be burned. Your engine could covered by your new vehicle warranty.

there’s one more thing you can try. When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the ADD mark. You can add the proper coolant mixture directly to the radiator. water can freeze and crack the You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine. If the overheat warning continues. start your vehicle. Coolant contains ethylene glycol Use the recommended coolant and the proper and it will burn if the engine parts are hot coolant mixture. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine. heater core and other parts. engine parts. enough.NOTICE: CAUTION: In cold weather. 5-13 . but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it. radiator.

Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap. Never turn the cap when the cooling system. CAUTION: Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. is hot. 5-14 . and if you turn the radiator pressure cap -.they can come out at high speed. including the radiator pressure cap. They are under pressure.even a little -.

5-15 . (Don’t press down while turning the pressure cap. is no longer hot.) If you hear a hiss. but now push down as you turn it. including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose. wait for that to stop. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops.How to Add Coolant to the Radiator 2. 1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system. Remove the pressure cap. Then keep turning the pressure cap. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.

up to the base of the filler neck. See 5. about the proper coolant mixture. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank. 5-16 . Then fill the coolant recovery tank to ADD mark. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOLR 4.3. coolant mixture. but “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more information leave the radiator pressure cap off.

Be sure the 7. If the level is lower. 5-17 . filler neck may be lower.6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the 8. Then replace the pressure cap. By this time. Watch out for the this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the engine cooling fan. the coolant level inside the radiator arrow on the pressure cap lines up like this. reinstall the pressure cap. filler neck. At any time during upper radiator hose getting hot. add more of the proper DEX-COOLR coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck.

It will go away as the fan clutch disengages. accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. This is normal and should not be mistaken as the Steer to maintain lane position. This improves But if you should ever have a “blowout. If a tire goes flat. In most everyday driving out of a tire. the fan speed increases when the clutch pulls the vehicle toward that side. If air goes more air to cool the engine. remove your foot from the You may also hear this fan noise when you start the accelerator pedal. It is merely a stop well out of the traffic lane. The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and A rear blowout. the flat tire will create a drag that temperatures.well off the road if possible. the fan spins faster to provide especially if you maintain your tires properly. Take your foot off the engages. the cooling system functioning properly. So you may hear an increase in fan noise. conditions.” here are a few fuel economy and reduces fan noise. It may be very bumpy and noisy. the clutch is not engaged. Get the vehicle under control by engine. In any rear blowout. trailer towing and/or high outside If a front tire fails. steering the way you want the vehicle to go. the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely. acts much like a the clutch disengages. When It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving. particularly on a curve. the clutch is engaged. Under heavy tips about what to expect and what to do: vehicle loading. 5-18 . it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. Gently brake to a stop -. but you can still steer.Engine Fan Noise If a Tire Goes Flat This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. and then gently brake to transmission slipping or making extra shifts. skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a skid.

That would be the CAUTION: tire on the other side of the vehicle. 5. 5-19 .not in NEUTRAL. 2. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed. Set the parking brake firmly. warning flashers. CAUTION: (Continued) The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and change a tire. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle. To help prevent the vehicle from moving: 1. Turn off the engine. Changing a tire can cause an injury.Changing a Flat Tire CAUTION: (Continued) If a tire goes flat. be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear -. Turn on your hazard 4. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in PARK (P) or shift a manual transmission to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R). The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people. avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. 3. Find a level place to change your tire. You and they could be badly injured. at the opposite end.

jack and in the rear bumper. depending on where it is mounted on your vehicle. sure the chisel end of the wheel wrench connects into the hoist shaft. insert the chisel cover. Be wheel wrench. pull up on the end of the wheel latch(es) on the cover. In some cases.Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The jacking equipment you’ll need is stored along the NOTICE: driver’s side inner rear quarter panel. you may have to remove the spare tire in order to reach the Never remove or restow a tire from/to a stowage jack. wrench. To remove your jack spare. on an angle. Remove the wheel into the hoist shaft hole blocks. Your vehicle is also equipped with work gloves position under the vehicle while the vehicle is and a plastic ground mat to assist in the changing of a supported by a jack. To remove the underbody-mounted 1. 5-20 . Always tighten the tire flat tire. See “Spare Tire” or “Compact Spare Tire” later in this section for more information about the spare. fully against the underside of the vehicle The following instructions explain how to remove the when restowing. spare tire. 2.

Keep turning the wheel wrench until can be removed by the spare tire has been completely lowered. Unhook the tire from the mounting bracket and remove the cover. Pull the tire out from under face of the lock case. the tire must be removed in order to have access to the jack storage. do not drive the vehicle before the cable is properly stored. To remove a rear-mounted spare tire. To remove an inside-mounted spare tire. NOTICE: To help avoid vehicle damage. Then remove the spare tire cover. Remove it and the retainer. the vehicle. first make sure that the carrier arm is fully-latched to the endgate. 5-21 . Tilt the snapping the rubber retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through weather cover off the the wheel opening. If you have an inside-mounted spare tire. reach into your tire’s cover and unscrew the wing nut at the center of the wheel.3. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower The locking wheel nut the spare tire.

5-22 . Put the spare tire near the flat tire. The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) and wheel wrench (B). It is not necessary to turn the key. Your vehicle may also have an optional hub cap removal tool. Insert the key and pull the lock case straight off.

fit these imitation nuts. in the notch of the hub the wheel nut caps. they must be removed in order to get to the wheel Position the chisel end of your wheel wrench. Remove these wheel nut caps before you take off wheel nuts molded into them. The wheel wrench won’t the hub cap. Use the socket end of the wheel wrench to remove cap removal tool (if equipped). 5-23 . Your wheel nut caps may attach your hub cap to the Some of the molded plastic hub caps have imitation wheel. so don’t try to remove them with the socket end of the wheel wrench. cap and pry off the hub cap. or the hub nuts.Removing the Wheel Cover If you have individual wheel nut caps that cover each nut.

5-24 . loosen all the wheel nuts. Fit the jack into the appropriate hole nearest the flat tire. 3.Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire A. 2. Rear Frame Hole (2-Door) or Spring Hanger Hole (4-Door) 1. Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the jack lift head. Don’t remove them yet. Front Frame Hole B. Using the wheel wrench.

Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire. lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the make the vehicle fall. CAUTION: Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. 5-25 . you could be badly injured or killed. 5. If the vehicle slips off the jack. CAUTION: Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly 4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle positioned can damage the vehicle and even clockwise. To help avoid personal ground so there is enough room for the spare injury and vehicle damage. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack. be sure to fit the jack tire to fit underneath the wheel well.

Rust or dirt on the wheel. In an emergency. 5-26 . you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this. if you need to. remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. or on the parts to which it is fastened. 6. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts. to get all the rust or dirt off. can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time. but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later. When you change a wheel. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. CAUTION: mounting surfaces and spare wheel.

8. 7. Make sure the rounded end is toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub. Place the spare on the wheel mounting surface. use the wheel wrench and see your dealer as soon as possible. If you do. causing a serious accident. Put the nuts on by CAUTION: hand. Your wheel could fall off. If a nut can’t be turned by hand. Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. 5-27 . the nuts might come loose.

5-28 . 9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. Use the wrench to tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown. Lower the jack completely. 10.

evenly tighten the wheel Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. 5-29 . Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 100 lb-ft (140 N·m). This could lead to an accident. If you have nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper to replace them. be sure to get new GM original torque specification. equipment wheel nuts. expensive brake repairs. To avoid and even come off. CAUTION: NOTICE: Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose brake pulsation and rotor damage.

Hoist Arm be stored under the vehicle with the hoist. loose equipment could strike someone. a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. Valve Stem F. Spare or Flat Tire H.Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools Follow this diagram to store the CAUTION: underbody-mounted spare. D. To avoid this. Retainer E. Storing a jack. Raise An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should always C. have the wheel repaired as soon as possible. Wheel Wrench NOTICE: B. storing it that way for an extended period could damage the wheel. 5-30 . Lower (Pointed Down) G. A. Spring However. In a sudden stop or collision. Store all these in the proper place.

5-31 . Push. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle. 5. through the hole in the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle. If the tire moves. pull. Put the chisel end of the wheel wrench.1. and then try to rotate or turn the tire. 2. use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. 4. The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened. Pull the retainer through the wheel. with the valve stem pointed down and to the rear. 3. on an angle. Continue turning the wheel wrench until the tire is secure and the cable is tight.

Retainer B. Hook 5-32 . Follow this diagram for the rear-mounted spare. Nut C. Wheel Carrier E. Spare or Flat Tire C.Follow this diagram for the inside-mounted spare. A. Spare or Flat Tire A. Wheel Carrier B. Wheel Nut and Locking Nut Cylinder D.

Jack E. Then push the lock case onto the lug nut until it stops. Return the jack. wrench. Rubber Band Removal Tool the proper location in your vehicle’s rear area. Jack Storage Cover J. Driving with the tire or carrier unlatched could injure pedestrians or damage the vehicle. Wheel Wrench C. only on the spare wheel carrier. A. Retainer G. The special lug nut and lock case is not intended to be used on any road wheel. (Some Models) (Some Models) Secure the items and replace the jack cover. The key does not have to be inserted into the lock. Wheel Blocks 5-33 . Work Gloves D. Mat I. Tighten the nuts on the wheel carrier to 22 to 32 lb-ft (30 to 40 N·m). Hub Cap 7.6. Jacking Instructions F. CAUTION: Make sure the tire and carrier are secure. Reinstall the locking wheel nut using the wheel Use the following diagram as a guide. H. Push the lock case to be sure it is secured. wheel wrench and wheel blocks to B.

you can finish your trip and Vehicle” in the Index. it’s best to repair or replace the on how to remove. the spare tire is smaller than your vehicle’s original road tires. After installing the repaired or replaced as soon as you can and installed compact spare on your vehicle. you should stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare The compact spare may lose air after a time. see damaged road tire as soon as you can. whether compact-size or full-size. stop as soon as back onto your vehicle. when new. Keep your spare tire and its don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with other wheel together. so check its inflation pressure regularly. After installing the spare tire on your vehicle. Keep your compact spare t If your vehicle has the Xtreme Sport Appearance and its wheel together. may lose made to perform at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) and air over time. install or store a spare tire. Don’t mix tires and wheels of different sizes. for information regarding proper then have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or tire inflation and loading your vehicle. be 60 psi (420 kPa). so check is correctly inflated. they won’t fit. Of course. Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles and because they won’t fit.000 miles (5 000 km). wheels or tires. Don’t include the compact spare in your tire rotation. spare tire will last longer and be in good shape in case you need it again. With the See “Inflation-Tire Pressure” and “Loading Your compact spare installed. Your compact “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index. had a fully inflated spare tire. 5-34 . so don’t include the spare in the tire rotation. a spare tire will be possible and make sure it’s correctly inflated. This way. It should available in case you need it again. The compact spare tire is a temporary replacement tire A spare tire. For instruction replaced. Package (RPO V4A). for distances up to 3.Spare Tire Compact Spare Tire (If Equipped) Your vehicle. Have the damaged or flat road tire the inflation pressure regularly.

And. you can destroy your transmission. Mud. Ice or Snow NOTICE: In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck. but you must use caution. don’t take If you let your tires spin at high speed. If you spin the wheels your wheels too fast. If You’re Stuck: In Sand. overheat. The method known as “rocking” too fast while shifting your transmission back can help you get out when you’re stuck. but you don’t want to spin vehicle as well as the tires. and forth. compartment fire or other damage. they can your vehicle through an automatic car wash with explode. The compact spare can get caught on the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can the rails. NOTICE: CAUTION: When the compact spare is installed. For information about using tire chains on your vehicle. see “Tire Chains” in the Index. guide rails. spin the wheels as little as possible. and you or others could be injured. When you’re Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. compact spare. Don’t use tire chains on your on the speedometer. 5-35 . Don’t them can damage your vehicle and can damage spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown the chains too. Using stuck. That could cause an engine and maybe other parts of your vehicle. you will Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your need to spin the wheels. That can damage the tire and wheel.

Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out Using the Recovery Hooks First. turn your steering wheel left and right. see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index. If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse directions. you can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle has them. 5-36 . Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks. shift into 4HI. You may need to use them if you’re stuck off-road and need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving. between FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R)). If you do need to be towed out. and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. That will clear the area around your front wheels. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift. you may need to be towed out. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear (or with a manual transmission. you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle. The hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle. spinning the wheels as little as possible. Or.

Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle. Always pull the vehicle straight out. are under a lot of force. 5-37 . CAUTION: These hooks. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty. The hooks could break off and you or others could be injured from the chain or cable snapping back. when used. NOTICE: Never use the recovery hooks to tow the vehicle.

Section 6 Service and Appearance Care Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. There is also technical information about your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information. and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. 6-2 Service 6-32 Brakes 6-3 Fuel 6-36 Battery 6-5 Fuels in Foreign Countries 6-37 Bulb Replacement 6-6 Filling Your Tank 6-42 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 6-8 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 6-45 Tires 6-8 Checking Things Under the Hood 6-55 Appearance Care 6-11 Engine Oil 6-55 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle 6-16 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 6-58 Care of Safety Belts 6-17 Automatic Transmission Fluid 6-59 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle 6-20 Manual Transmission Fluid 6-63 GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials 6-21 Hydraulic Clutch 6-64 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 6-22 Rear Axle 6-64 Service Parts Identification Label 6-23 Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) 6-65 Electrical System 6-25 Engine Coolant 6-71 Replacement Bulbs 6-29 Radiator Pressure Cap 6-71 Capacities and Specifications 6-29 Power Steering Fluid 6-73 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 6-30 Windshield Washer Fluid 6- 6-1 . and a part devoted to its appearance care.

Service Doing Your Own Service Work Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to If you want to do some of your own service work. Before attempting to do your own service work. can. see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. You’ll get genuine GM parts and more about how to service your vehicle than this manual GM-trained and supported service people. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: Your vehicle has an air bag system. It tells you much all your service needs. We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. 6-2 . See “Maintenance Record” in the Index. You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform. To order the proper service manual. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for want to use the proper service manual. you’ll be happy with it. see “Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.

“English” and “metric” It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications fasteners can be easily confused. If you use which were developed by the American Automobile the wrong fasteners. parts can later break Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the or fall off. Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers’ Association for better vehicle performance and engine protection. 6-3 . Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it. heavy knocking noise when you drive. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle. You could be hurt. D Be sure to use the proper nuts. the proper replacement parts normal. noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is considered experience. it can damage your engine. Gasolines meeting these specifications could provide improved Adding Equipment to the Outside of driveability and emission control system performance Your Vehicle compared to other gasolines. This does not indicate a problem exists or that a and tools before you attempt any vehicle higher-octane fuel is necessary. Fuel CAUTION: Gasoline Octane You can be injured and your vehicle could be Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of damaged if you try to do service work on a 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87. bolts and Gasoline Specifications other fasteners. If it is bad enough. This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance. you may get a vehicle without knowing enough about it. A little pinging D Be sure you have sufficient knowledge. maintenance task.

If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used. look for California Fuel the “Auto Makers’ If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Choice” label on Standards (see the underhood emission control label). return to your authorized GM dealer for Canada Only diagnosis. is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications. repairs may not be covered by your warranty. If this occurs. but emission control system performance may be affected. 6-4 . The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on (see “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index) and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards. it the pump. your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications. In Canada.

General Motors does methanol. 6-5 . ask an auto club. That damage wouldn’t be covered under the performance of the emission control system may your warranty. or your area to contribute to clean air. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. find. and reformulated gasolines may be available in To check on fuel availability. ask the attendant where you buy gasoline contains methanol. caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by Gasolines containing oxygenates. Fuels in Foreign Countries To provide cleaner air. It can corrode metal parts in your not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and parts. Don’t use fuel containing whether the fuel contains MMT. return to your authorized GM dealer for service.Additives Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low NOTICE: emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that (MMT). recommended in the previous text on fuel. be affected. General Motors contact a major oil company that does business in the recommends that you use these gasolines. particularly if country where you’ll be driving. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not allowing your emission control system to work properly. such as ethers and your warranty. they comply with the specifications described earlier. Costly repairs You should not have to add anything to your fuel. all gasolines in the United States If you plan on driving in another country outside the are now required to contain additives that will help United States or Canada. the proper fuel may be hard to prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming. ethanol. If this occurs.

Keep sparks. 6-6 . hang the fuel cap by the tether from the driver’s side of hook on the filler door. The fuel cap has a spring in it. To remove the fuel cap. it will spring back to the right. flames and smoking materials away from gasoline. and that can cause very bad injuries.Filling Your Tank CAUTION: Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. turn it slowly to the left (counterclockwise). It burns violently. The fuel cap is behind a hinged door on While refueling. if you let go of the cap too soon. Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling your vehicle. your vehicle.

and is more likely in hot weather. be sure to get the right type. emissions system. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the the Index. 6-7 . fuel cap too quickly. This Be careful not to spill gasoline. Make sure you fully install the cap. If you need a new fuel cap. Clean gasoline from may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to painted surfaces as soon as possible. turn it to the right CAUTION: (clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. it may not fit properly. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the something ignites it. This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full. atmosphere. Then unscrew the cap all the way. See “Cleaning the light and may damage your fuel tank and Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index. If you get the wrong type. When you put the fuel cap back on. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly If you get gasoline on yourself and then installed. Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for NOTICE: any “hiss” noise to stop. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index. you could be badly burned. Your dealer can get one for you.

You or others could occurs. Static electricity discharge from the start a fire. and plastic or rubber. Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete. 6-8 . D Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline. Be careful not to drop or spill things D Dispense gasoline only into approved that will burn onto a hot engine. container can ignite the gasoline vapor. To help avoid injury to you and others: be burned. brake fluid. D Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle. in a vehicle’s trunk. D Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. windshield washer and other be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this fluids. pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground.Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under the Hood CAUTION: CAUTION: Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and your vehicle. containers. These include liquids like fuel. oil. You can coolant.

Hood Release Before closing the hood. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the To open the hood. Release the hood prop from its retainer and put the hood prop into the slot in the hood. It will latch when dropped from about 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm) instrument panel. Pull the handle Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and located inside the return the prop to its retainer. Lift the hood. 2. pull the hood down firmly to close. 1. 3. vehicle on the lower left side of the Then. do the following: hood prop. without pressing on the hood. be sure all the filler caps are on properly. 6-9 .

Automatic Transmission Dipstick H. Engine Oil Dipstick F. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block D. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter B. Battery E. Engine Oil Fill G. Power Steering Reservoir J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir 6-10 . Coolant Recovery Tank (If Equipped) I.Engine Compartment Overview When you open the hood. Clutch Master Cylinder Reservoir C. you will see the following: A.

If you don’t. then push it back in all the way. keeping the tip down. The oil dipstick handle is a yellow ring located in the engine compartment toward the passenger side of the vehicle. It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or get fuel. the oil must cloth. the oil dipstick Checking Engine Oil might not show the actual level.Engine Oil Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan. Remove it again. 6-11 . In order to get an accurate reading. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for more information on location. be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. and check the level.

as shown in the following chart: Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for more information on the location of the engine oil You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your fill cap. If your engine has so front of the oil container. This part explains what kind of oil to use.When to Add Engine Oil What Kind of Engine Oil to Use If the oil is at or below the ADD line. your engine could be damaged. If you change your own oil. see “Capacities and the American Petroleum Institute (API). compartment toward the passenger side of the vehicle. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you’re through. If much oil that the oil level gets above the you have your oil changed cross-hatched area that shows the proper for you. into your engine is American Petroleum Institute certified for The engine oil fill cap is located in the engine gasoline engines. oil which does not carry this starburst symbol. be sure the oil put operating range. 6-12 . then you’ll need Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by to add at least one quart of oil. NOTICE: be sure you use oil that has the starburst symbol on the Don’t add too much oil. But you must use the looking for the starburst symbol. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by For engine oil crankcase capacity. Do not use any Specifications” in the Index. right kind. vehicle.

If you are in an area where the temperature falls below -20_F (-29_C). These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity. Do not use other viscosity oils. 6-13 . Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty. GM GoodwrenchR oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle. you can use SAE 10W-30 if it’s _ _ going to be 0 F (-18 C) or above. or thickness. However. SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. such as SAE 20W-50.As in the chart shown previously. NOTICE: Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures. consider using either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil.

D The vehicle is used for delivery service. occurs first. The recommended oils vehicle.whichever occurs first. use the short trip/city maintenance schedule. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed D Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). below freezing. then you need to change your oil and filter with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good every 3.whichever performance and engine protection. If any one of these is true for your Don’t add anything to your oil.Engine Oil Additives Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to break down sooner. D You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of your vehicle. 6-14 . taxi or other commercial application. Change the oil and filter every maintenance schedule: 7.000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months -. police. D Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent driving in stop-and-go traffic). When to Change Engine Oil If none of them is true. use the long trip/highway If any one of these is true for you.500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -. This is engine under highway conditions will cause engine oil particularly important when outside temperatures are to break down slower.

filter before disposal. pouring it on the ground. or a good hand radiator support. into sewers.Remote Oil Filter (Four-Wheel Drive) What to Do with Used Oil The access door for the Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be remote oil filter is in the unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. If you open the warnings about the use and disposal of oil products. If you securely closed when change your own oil. Clean assembly located under the your skin and nails with soap and water. steering linkage shield Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Turn the cleaner. recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. Instead. or into streams or bodies of water. See the manufacturer’s the door. a service station or a local recycling center for help. make sure it is Used oil can be a threat to the environment. door. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash. ask your dealer. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil. Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags screw to unlock or lock containing used engine oil. 6-15 . be sure to drain all the oil from the you are finished.

See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. it stops flame if the engine backfires. 4. 2. If it isn’t there. Remove the fasteners that hold the cover on and your engine. Don’t drive with it off. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for more information on the location of the engine air cleaner/filter. of the engine compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle. And. Insert a new air filter. and the engine backfires. you could be burned. a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire. if needed. The air cleaner not only cleans the air. dirt can easily get into 1. air cleaner/filter in place when you’re driving.Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 3. CAUTION: Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. Lift out the engine air cleaner/filter. which will damage it. 6-16 . and be careful working on the The engine air cleaner/filter is located toward the front engine with the air cleaner/filter off. NOTICE: To check or replace the engine air cleaner/filter do the following: If the air cleaner/filter is off. Always have the remove the cover. Reinstall the engine air cleaner/filter cover. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in 6-17 .Automatic Transmission Fluid How to Check Because this operation can be a little difficult. or you could get a false reading (25 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or on the dipstick. Be sure to get an accurate reading if 50. Too much or too little fluid can damage your D When doing frequent trailer towing. be sure to follow all the Change both the fluid and filter every 15. level is when the engine oil is changed. change the fluid and filter every overheat. parts or exhaust system parts.000 miles instructions here. starting a fire. D In hilly or mountainous terrain. If you do it yourself. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine D Uses such as found in taxi. police or delivery service.000 miles (83 000 km). more of these conditions: D In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature NOTICE: regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher. Too If you do not use your vehicle under any of these little fluid could cause the transmission to conditions. transmission. you check your transmission fluid. you may When to Check and Change choose to have this done at the dealership service A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid department.

which is 180_F to lever through each gear range. Should the fluid level be low during this cold check. Keep the engine D At high speed for quite a while. move the shift normal operating temperature. A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off. the fluid should be at D With your foot on the brake pedal. Then. 6-18 . in PARK (P).especially in hot weather. running. three seconds in each range. you may have to idle the engine longer. Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50_F D Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more. D With the parking brake applied. place the shift lever D While pulling a trailer. To get the right reading. Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50_F (10_C) or more. but this is used only as a reference.Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the Checking the Fluid Level transmission fluid level if you have been driving: Prepare your vehicle as follows: D When outside temperatures are above 90_F (32_C). position the shift lever in PARK (P). (10_C). If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C). D Park your vehicle on a level place. Checking the fluid hot will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level. D In heavy traffic -. If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C). drive the vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes. pausing for about 200_F (82_C to 93_C). you must check the fluid hot before adding fluid.

wait three seconds and then pull it back out again. Push it back in all the way. See “Engine Compartment 3. 1. 6-19 . then flip the handle location. 2.Then. follow these steps: The transmission dipstick handle has this symbol on it. push the Overview” in the Index for more information on dipstick back in all the way. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. down to lock the dipstick in place. The transmission dipstick is located near the center of the engine compartment . If the fluid level is in the acceptable range. without shutting off the engine.

transmission.” little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat.How to Add Fluid Manual Transmission Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use. 6-20 . choose to have this done at your GM dealership service department. See “Recommended When to Check Fluids and Lubricants” in A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is changed. (A cold check is used only as a reference. We recommend you use only fluid labeled DEXRONR-III. starting a fire. It doesn’t take much fluid. Too D After adding fluid. Don’t overfill. or you could get a false reading. Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRONR-III Too much or too little fluid can damage your is not covered by your new vehicle warranty. the fluid in your manual Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid transmission doesn’t require changing. be sure to follow all the NOTICE: instructions here. while it is hot. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts. If you do it yourself. Be sure to get an accurate reading if D When the correct fluid level is obtained. then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place.5 L). you may than one pint (0. push the you check your transmission fluid. because fluid with that label is NOTICE: made especially for your automatic transmission. However. add only enough of How to Check the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. recheck the fluid level as described under “How to Check.) If the fluid level is low. generally less Because this operation can be a little difficult. dipstick back in all the way.

Be sure the plug is fully seated. Then. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the filler plug hole. 1. 3. Refer to the Maintenance transmission case. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of the filler plug hole. add more fluid as described in the next steps. Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. Hydraulic Clutch The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is self-adjusting. 3. Remove the filler plug. The clutch master cylinder reservoir is filled with hydraulic clutch fluid. If the fluid level is good. Adding fluid won’t correct a leak. 6-21 . A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Remove the filler plug.Check the fluid level only when your engine is off. follow these steps: 1. 2. install the plug and be sure it is fully seated. Have the system inspected and repaired. 2. Install the filler plug. the How to Add Fluid vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the Here’s how to add fluid. If the fluid level is low.

See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. See the instructions on the reservoir cap. you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. How to Check and Add Fluid To get an accurate reading. the reservoir.When to Check and What to Use Rear Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it. 6-22 . the vehicle should be on a The proper fluid should be added if the level does not level surface. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it’s in place in If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole. How to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often you should check the fluid level in your clutch master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid.

See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. the vehicle should be on a level surface. Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these vehicles. If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole. you’ll need to add some lubricant. there are two additional systems that need lubrication.What to Use How to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. 6-23 . See “Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in the Index. To get an accurate reading. Use care not to overtighten the plug. However. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant.

add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. the vehicle should be on a level surface. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole.What to Use How to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it. you may need to add some lubricant. When the differential is at operating temperature (warm). See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. To get an accurate reading. add enough lubricant to raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler plug hole. When the differential is cold. 6-24 .

it is important that you use the Index. See “Recommended Fluids and D Give freezing protection down to -34_F (-37_C).000 miles D Let the warning lights and gages work as (240 000 km). the engine coolant will require change sooner -. DEX-COOLR extended life coolant. drinkable water and Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what DEX-COOLR coolant will: kind of lubricant to use. Engine Coolant D Protect against rust and corrosion. In addition. premature engine. Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX-COOLR is not covered by your new vehicle warranty. whichever occurs first. DEX-COOLR engine coolant.000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months. whichever occurs first. 6-25 . D Give boiling protection up to 265_F (129_C). heater core or radiator corrosion may result. If you have a problem with engine overheating. The following explains your cooling system and how NOTICE: to add coolant when it is low. Lubricants” in the Index.at 30. The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with D Help keep the proper engine temperature. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150. only DEX-COOLR (silicate-free) coolant. If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to the system. see “Engine Overheating” in When adding coolant.What to Use A 50/50 mixture of clean. if you add only they should.

Plain water. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. Too much water in the mixture can CAUTION: freeze and crack the engine. drinkable water and NOTICE: one-half DEX-COOLR coolant which won’t damage aluminum parts. you don’t have to catch fire and you or others could be burned. The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. heater core and other parts. can boil before the proper have your dealer check your cooling system. Your engine could If you use the proper coolant. If you use this coolant mixture. Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Use add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to a 50/50 mixture of clean. NOTICE: your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. your don’t need to add anything else. DEX-COOLR coolant. coolant mixture will. drinkable water and improve the system. These can be harmful. 6-26 . or some other If you have to add coolant more than four times a year.What to Use Use a mixture of one-half clean. you If you use an improper coolant mixture. engine could overheat and be badly damaged. With plain water or the wrong mixture. liquid such as alcohol. radiator.

See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for more information on location.Checking Coolant The coolant recovery tank is located in the engine compartment near the passenger side of the vehicle. When your engine is cold. The vehicle must be on a level surface. or a little higher. the level should be up to FULL HOT. or a little higher. 6-27 . When your engine is warm. the coolant level should be at ADD.

CAUTION: and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Coolant contains ethylene glycol.when the engine and radiator are hot. add the proper DEX-COOLR CAUTION: coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank. Never turn the radiator pressure cap -. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine. you will “Cooling System” in the Index. 6-28 . almost never have to add coolant at the radiator. see badly. For information on how to add coolant to the radiator.Adding Coolant If you need more coolant.even a little -. Turning the radiator pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. but be careful not to spill it. Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank. With the coolant recovery tank.

6-29 . Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck.Radiator Pressure Cap Power Steering Fluid The power steering reservoir is located near the front of the engine compartment on the driver’s side of NOTICE: the vehicle. Your radiator cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa) pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating.

Failure to use the proper could indicate a problem. repaired. If you will be unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature Replace the cap and completely tighten it. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for reservoir location. then the manufacturer’s instructions before use. When you need windshield washer fluid. protection against freezing. A fluid loss in this system Always use the proper fluid. you hear an unusual noise. If necessary. 6-30 . add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the proper range. Have the system inspected and fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals. let the engine compartment cool down. Then remove may fall below freezing. be sure to read wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean. use a fluid that has sufficient the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick. see fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. Windshield Washer Fluid How to Check Power Steering Fluid What to Use Turn the key off. The level should be between the ADD and FULL marks.When to Check Power Steering Fluid What to Use It is not necessary to regularly check power steering To determine what kind of fluid to use.

water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located toward NOTICE: the front of the engine compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle. the Index for more information on location. Also. D Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it’s very cold. This allows for expansion if freezing occurs. D Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your windshield washer. which could damage the tank if it is completely full. follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water. Water can cause the solution to freeze Add washer fluid until the and damage your washer fluid tank and tank is full. 6-31 . other parts of the washer system. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in D When using concentrated washer fluid. It can damage your washer system and paint. fluid. Open the cap with the D Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer washer symbol on it.

See “Engine Compartment hydraulic system. it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. it can spill on the engine. You or others could be burned. See “Periodic Maintenance lining wear. or won’t work at all. as necessary.Brakes of the brake system. If it is. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough. since a leak means that sooner or later your Brake Fluid brakes won’t work well. the fluid level Inspections” in the Index. and your vehicle could be damaged. CAUTION: If you have too much brake fluid. The first is that the brake fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake check your brake fluid. Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. So. See “Checking Brake Fluid” in Overview” in the Index for the location of the reservoir. you should have your brake system fixed. You should add (or remove) brake fluid. only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. When new linings are put in. then you’ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out 6-32 . If you add fluid when your linings are worn. Add brake Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with fluid only when work is done on the brake DOT-3 brake fluid. this section.

Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” Just look at the brake in the Index. CAUTION: With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system. When you do need brake fluid. If it isn’t. around the cap before removing it. make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark. your brakes may not work well.Checking Brake Fluid What to Add You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap. system checked to see if there is a leak. 6-33 . Use new brake fluid from a sealed fluid reservoir. This could cause a After work is done on the brake hydraulic system. Always use the proper brake fluid. crash. The container only. This will help keep have your brake dirt from entering the reservoir. fluid level should be Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area above MIN. use only DOT-3 brake fluid. or they may not even work at all.

For example. just a few high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. See “Appearance Care” in warning sound. D Using the wrong fluid can badly damage Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a brake system parts. have your vehicle serviced. Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid. That could lead to on your vehicle. the Index. The sound may come and drops of mineral-based oil. system parts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced. Brake Wear NOTICE: Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes. in your brake system can damage brake when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly). such as engine go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except oil. If you do. When you hear the brake wear immediately. NOTICE: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair. 6-34 . wash it off an accident. Be careful not to spill brake fluid your brakes won’t work well. CAUTION: D If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted surfaces. the paint finish can be The brake wear warning sound means that soon damaged.

This could be a sign of brake trouble. when your brake linings wear See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this manual down and you need new ones put in -. your Brake Pedal Travel brakes may no longer work properly.Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake Brake Adjustment squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. the balance between your front and rear brakes normal height. 6-35 . The braking performance travel. you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts. This does not mean something is wrong with Every time you make a brake stop. your disc brakes your brakes. or if there is a rapid increase in pedal can change -.for example. inspect The braking system on a vehicle is complex.for the worse. Its many brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the parts have to be of top quality and work well together if proper sequence to GM torque specifications. Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help Replacing Brake System Parts prevent brake pulsation. Your vehicle Brake linings should always be replaced as complete was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake axle sets.” new approved GM replacement parts. the vehicle is to have really good braking. if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to vehicle. parts. For example. adjust for wear.be sure you get under Part C “Periodic Maintenance Inspections. When tires are rotated. When you replace parts of your braking system -. If you don’t.

battery. for your audio system. You can be badly hurt if you aren’t careful. chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas reproductive harm. terminals and related CAUTION: accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods.Battery Vehicle Storage Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days ACDelcoR battery. When it’s time for a new battery. We recommend an ACDelco running down. WARNING: Battery posts. Wash hands after handling. Also. 6-36 . that can explode. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for battery location. see “Theft-Deterrent Feature” in the Index. remove the black. get or more. This will help keep your battery from original battery’s label. negative (-) cable from one that has the replacement number shown on the the battery. See “Jump Starting” in the Index for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt.

Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package. 3. Remove the black retainer clips by lifting up. 4. Halogen Bulbs CAUTION: Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. contact your GM dealer’s 1. 2.Bulb Replacement Headlamps See “Replacement Bulbs” in the Index for the proper One-Piece Composite Headlamp System types of bulbs to use. Unplug the electrical connector. Open the hood. For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section. service department. Pull the headlamp assembly out. 6-37 . You or others could be injured.

10. Close the hood. Plug in the electrical connector. 9. 8. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle. 6-38 . Put the new bulb/socket assembly into the headlamp assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight. 7. Turn the bulb/socket assembly counterclockwise to remove it. Install the two retaining clips. 6. 5.

Put the new bulb/socket assembly into the headlamp 2. Turn the bulb/socket assembly counterclockwise to remove it. 5. Open the hood. 7. 8. 9. Remove the black retainer clips by lifting up. Plug in the electrical connector.Two-Piece Composite Headlamp System 1. Install the two retaining clips. Close the hood. 6-39 . Pull the headlamp assembly out. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle. assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight. 3. 4. 6.

7. The assembly will swing out. Remove the headlamp assembly as shown under “One-Piece Composite Headlamp System” earlier in “Two-Piece Composite Headlamp System” earlier in this section. this section.One-Piece Front Turn Signal Lamps Two-Piece Front Turn Signal Lamps 1. 3. Put the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight. 6. Locate the locking tabs headlamp assembly. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle. 5. on the assembly. Pull the bulb straight out to remove it from the socket. Twist the bulb socket to remove it from the 2. 4. Push the new bulb into the socket until it snaps into place. Remove the headlamp assembly as shown under 1. Unplug the electrical connector. Squeeze the tabs together and push that end of the assembly out while holding the tabs. 2. 6-40 . 3. 8. Install the two retaining clips. Close the hood.

Pull the bulb straight out to remove it from the socket. Close the hood. 10. Reinstall the harness bulb socket with the new bulb into the headlamp assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight. Install the two retaining clips. snap the outboard end of the lamp assembly back into the vehicle. 4. 7. 5. 8. 6. Then swing the assembly in and snap it into place. Turn the harness bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it. 6-41 . Push the new bulb into the socket until it snaps into place. To reinstall the assembly. 9.

3. Remove the two screws from the lamp assembly. Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice a year for wear or cracking. lift the wiper arm 6. 8. NOTICE: 4. 1. Push the new bulb straight into the socket until until it locks into a vertical position. Use care when removing or installing a blade Push the tab in while you turn the socket assembly. 9.Taillamps 7. 1. to fall back and strike the windshield. 2. Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it. Accidental bumping can cause the arm counterclockwise. Close the endgate. To remove the old wiper blades. Put the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise until it locks in place. it clicks. Install the lamp assembly and tighten the screws. See “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” in the Index for the proper type of replacement blade. Pull the assembly away from the vehicle. 5. 6-42 . Open the endgate. See “Windshield Wiper Blade Check” in the Index for more information. pull the bulb straight out of the socket. Holding the base of the bulb.

Arm Hook notched end last. Hook Slot 4. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab. At the notched end. Arm Assembly E. Blade Pivot B. To install the new wiper insert. pull the insert from the blade assembly. into the end with two blade claws (A). 3. The insert has two notches at one end that are locked by the bottom claws of the blade assembly. blade claws at the opposite end (B). 6-43 . C. A. Locking Tab F. fully inserted. Slide the insert all the way through the 2. Remove the insert from the blade assembly. Blade Assembly D. The plastic Pull down on the blade assembly to release it from caps (C) will be forced off as the insert is the wiper arm hook. slide the insert (D).

hook slot. 7. A. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom 6. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly onto the windshield. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm claws.5. so care should be used when pulling it away from the vehicle. Correct Installation C. Make sure that all other claws are properly hook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in the locked on both sides of the insert slots. Incorrect Installation 6-44 . The backglass wiper blade will not lock in a vertical position like the windshield wiper blade. Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement See “Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement” in this section for instructions on how to change the backglass wiper blade. Claw in Notch B.

Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure.Tires CAUTION: (Continued) Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. D Worn. replace them. If you ever have questions D Underinflated tires pose the same danger as about your tire warranty and where to obtain service. The resulting accident your GM Warranty booklet for details. CAUTION: (Continued) 6-45 . D Overloading your tires can cause Keep tires at the recommended pressure. the Index. see overloaded tires. impact -. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in been damaged. overheating as a result of too much friction. punctured or broken by a sudden are dangerous. Tire pressure should be checked CAUTION: when your tires are cold.such as when you hit a pothole. or if your tires have accident. D Overinflated tires are more likely to be Poorly maintained and improperly used tires cut. If your You could have an air-out and a serious tread is badly worn. old tires can cause accidents. could cause serious injury.

you can get the following: D Unusual wear D Bad handling D Rough ride D Needless damage from road hazards 6-46 . which is on the driver’s NOTICE: door edge. above the door latch.Inflation -. Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or “Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least overinflation is all right. don’t have enough air (underinflation). It’s not. shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold. If your tires three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1. you can get the following: D Too much flexing D Too much heat D Tire overloading D Bad wear D Bad handling D Bad fuel economy If your tires have too much air (overinflation).Tire Pressure The Certification/Tire label.6 km).

Also. (10 000 to 13 000 km). If it pressure. The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. Radial tires may look “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools” in the Index. The first They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and rotation is the most important. Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire Push. 6-47 . Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See simply by looking at them. and then try to rotate or turn the tire. pull. rotate your tires as soon as possible and check at 60 psi (420 kPa). Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated moves. use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.When to Check Tire Inspection and Rotation Check your tires once a month or more. See “Scheduled moisture. Any time you notice unusual If you have a compact spare tire. check the Tires should be rotated every 6.000 miles tire pressure of the spare tire.000 to 8. properly inflated even when they’re underinflated. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and How to Check “Wheel Replacement” later in this section for more information. wheel alignment. uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. it should be wear. Make sure the spare tire is stored securely.

remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. or on the parts to which it is fastened. When you change a wheel. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. can make wheel nuts become loose after a time. always use one of the correct rotation patterns shown here. When rotating your tires. CAUTION: Rust or dirt on a wheel. See in the Index. you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this. adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Certification/Tire label. 6-48 . In an emergency. to get all the rust or dirt off. do not include the spare in the tire rotation. If your vehicle has a compact spare tire or a spare tire that does not match your vehicle’s regular road tires and wheels in size and type. After the tires have been rotated. if you need to. but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.

cut or other damage that can’t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage. cut or snagged deep (1.6 mm) or less of enough to show cord or fabric. bulge or split. D The tire has a bump. D The tire has a puncture.When It’s Time for New Tires You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true: One way to tell when it’s time for new tires D You can see the indicators at three or more places is to check the treadwear around the tire. which will D You can see cord or fabric showing through the appear when your tires tire’s rubber. have only 1/16 inch D The tread or sidewall is cracked. indicators. tread remaining. 6-49 .

causing a crash. your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed Using tires of different sizes may also cause to give proper endurance. speed rating. the TPC number will be followed by an “MS” It’s all right to drive with your compact spare (for mud and snow). and you could have a crash. (if you have one). ride and other things during normal service on size and type tires on all wheels. (radial and bias-belted tires). That way handle properly. the vehicle may not get ones with that same TPC Spec number. damage to your vehicle. handling. speed rating and construction type (bias. make sure they are the same size. If you mix tires of different sizes or types number on each tire’s sidewall. If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number. Be sure to use the same traction. CAUTION: If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle. the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving. your vehicle.Buying New Tires To find out what kind and size of tires you need. look at CAUTION: the Certification/Tire label. When you get new tires. load range. bias-belted or radial) as your original tires. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly. 6-50 . If your tires have an all-season tread design. It was developed for use on your vehicle. The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) driving.

and may depart significantly from the norm treadwear. conditions on specified government test surfaces of While the tires available on General Motors passenger asphalt and concrete. C does not apply to deep tread. The relative performance of tires developed by the United States National Highway depends upon the actual conditions of their use. and does not include acceleration. For example: conditions on a specified government test course. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system Traction -.) The differences in road characteristics and climate. For example. traction and temperature performance. space-saver or temporary use spare tires. winter-type snow tires. service practices and applies only to vehicles sold in the United States. (This due to variations in driving habits. A. B. hydroplaning. they must also conform to federal safety assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking requirements and additional General Motors Tire traction tests. A tire marked C may have poor cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these traction performance. from highest to lowest. Warning: The traction grade grades. cornering. are AA.Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled width. or peak traction characteristics. a tire graded 150 would wear one and a Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course The following information relates to the system as a tire graded 100. B.AA. stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled or to some limited-production tires. Performance Criteria (TPC) standards. The traction grades. which grades tires by however. and C. Traffic Safety Administration. grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm). 6-51 . tires with A.

may need to be rebalanced. can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. your wheels Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. C Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The temperature grades are A (the highest). and needed. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. If you notice your vehicle which all passenger car tires must meet under the vibrating when driving on a smooth road. the alignment The grade C corresponds to a level of performance may need to be reset. or excessive loading. 109. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. if you notice unusual tire wear or excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Sustained high temperature can cause the Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life. underinflation. B. However. B. 6-52 . your vehicle pulling one way or the other. Excessive speed. either separately or in combination. The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under and best overall performance. and C.A.Temperature -.

Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted CAUTION:
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your It could affect the braking and handling of your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need. lose control. You could have a collision in which
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying you or others could be injured. Always use the
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for
same way as the one it replaces. replacement.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle. NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis.

See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more
information.

6-53

Used Replacement Wheels Tire Chains

CAUTION: CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is Don’t use tire chains. There’s not enough
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without
how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly the proper amount of clearance can cause
and cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, damage to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle
use a new GM original equipment wheel. parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could
cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you
or others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels.

6-54

Appearance Care D Turpentine
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some D Lacquer Thinner
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a D Nail Polish Remover
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space. They can all be hazardous -- some more than
When you use anything from a container to clean your others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
and instructions. And always open your doors or In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
D Alcohol
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
D Laundry Soap
D Gasoline
D Bleach
D Benzene
D Reducing Agents
D Naphtha
D Carbon Tetrachloride
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
D Acetone dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces
D Paint Thinner with a clean, damp cloth.

6-55

Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet 4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate
the material and don’t rub it roughly.
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and
carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very 5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
well. You can get GM-approved cleaning products from to remove any excess cleaner.
your dealer. See “Appearance Care and Materials” in 6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
the Index. towel or cloth.
Here are some cleaning tips: 7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
D Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
D Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
D Carefully scrape off any excess stain. egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and
D Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean blood can be removed as follows:
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
are stubborn. soiled area with cool water.
D If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the 2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
entire area immediately or it will set. described earlier.
Using Cleaner on Fabric 3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt. 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask of lukewarm water.
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines. 4. Let dry.
3. Follow the directions on the container label.

6-56

Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili Cleaning Leather
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain. saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
dry completely. D For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions dealer for this product.
described earlier. D Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
Cleaning Vinyl
D Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
Use warm water and a clean cloth. immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the
D Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You finish, it can harm the leather.
may have to do it more than once.
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel
D Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
this product. waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.

6-57

Cleaning Interior Plastic Components Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
surface finish. tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.
Cleaning Wood Panels
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (use
mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately NOTICE:
with a clean cloth.
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they
Care of Safety Belts may cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the
Keep belts clean and dry. inside rear window, since they may have to be
scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners are used on
the inside of the rear window, an electric
CAUTION: defogger element may be damaged. Any
temporary license should not be attached across
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it the defogger grid.
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and
lukewarm water.

6-58

Cleaning the Outside of the Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
Windshield, Backglass and The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
Wiper Blades of color, gloss retention and durability.
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield Washing Your Vehicle
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
windshield. keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
do not form when you rinse it with water. Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or
chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades removing all soap residue completely. You can get
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. See
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index. Don’t
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water. use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary; contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be
replace blades that look worn. flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface,
or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean
Weatherstrips chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every your vehicle.
six months. During very cold, damp weather more
frequent application may be required. See
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.

6-59

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car NOTICE:
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow
instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.” Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on
a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the
Finish Care finish or leave swirl marks.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
from your dealer. See “Appearance Care and Materials” droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
in the Index. damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
paint finish. and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.

6-60

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic vehicle
wash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep These brushes can also damage the surface of
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually these wheels.
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary. Cleaning Tires
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A
coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended NOTICE:
for all bright metal parts.
When applying a tire dressing always take care to
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted
(If Equipped) surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with Petroleum-based products may damage the paint
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After finish and tires.
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
Sheet Metal Damage
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish replaced to restore corrosion protection.
on aluminum wheels. Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

6-61

Bare metal will corrode of the frame should be loosened before being flushed. If these are not discolorations. fractures or deep scratches in the finish and other debris can collect. and small irregular dark spots etched into removed. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and Underbody Maintenance attack painted surfaces on your vehicle.Finish Damage At least every spring. Dirt packed in closed areas should be repaired right away. This damage Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust can take two forms: blotchy. Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout. flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the the paint surface. Your dealer or an underbody vehicle washing system Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up can do this for you. frame. at no charge to the owner. GM will and exhaust system even though they have corrosion repair. floor pan Although no defect in the paint job causes this. underbody parts such as fuel lines. the surfaces of new protection.000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase. 6-62 . materials available from your dealer or other service outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected Chemical Paint Spotting in your dealer’s body and paint shop. ringlet-shaped control can collect on the underbody. quickly and may develop into a major repair expense. whichever occurs first. vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12. Clean any areas where mud Any stone chips.

GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials 6-63 .

specifications and replacement parts. 6-64 . Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle. a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel. It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts.Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Engine Identification The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. on the driver’s side. It appears on D your VIN. The VIN also D paint information and appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts D a list of all production options and special labels and the certificates of title and registration. windshield from outside your vehicle. On this label is: This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This code will help you identify your engine. You can see it if you look through the D the model designation. Service Parts Identification Label You’ll find this label on the inside of the glove box. equipment.

Electrical System Headlamps The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal Add-On Electrical Equipment circuit breaker. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off. or in some cases to remain off. NOTICE: If this happens. they should. 6-65 . be can keep other components from working as sure to get it fixed. the wiper will stop until the motor cools. Before attempting to Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other add anything electrical to your vehicle. see “Servicing power accessories. Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index. When the current load is too heavy. Some add-on electrical equipment the overload is caused by some electrical problem. Some The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit electrical equipment can damage your vehicle breaker and a fuse. have your headlamp wiring checked right away. If warranty. the circuit breaker opens and closes. If the motor overheats due to heavy and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your snow or ice. Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle Windshield Wipers unless you check with your dealer first. Power Windows and Other Power Options Your vehicle has an air bag system. protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.

like the radio or cigarette lighter -. if it is the correct amperage.and use its fuse. If the instrument panel. Remove the cover by turning the fastener Replace it as soon as you can. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating. 6-66 . you can borrow one that has the same amperage. counterclockwise. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without -. Extra fuses and the fuse extractor are provided in the cover. band is broken or melted. push in and turn the fastener clockwise. replace the fuse. To reinstall the fuse panel cover. If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a spare fuse.Fuses and Circuit Breakers Instrument Panel Fuse Block The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from The instrument panel fuse short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit block is located at the end breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused of the instrument panel on by electrical problems. the driver’s side of the Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.

Body Control Module. Body Control Module. Fuse/Circuit Usage Breaker 3 Cruise Control Module and Switch. Power Window Switch. Body Control Module. Heated Seats 4 Gages. Data 13 Auxiliary Power Link Connector 6-67 . Battery Run-Down Protection Fuse/Circuit Usage Breaker 9 HVAC Control Head (Manual) A Not Used 10 Turn Signal B Not Used 11 Cluster. Headlamp Relay 8 Courtesy Lamps. Engine Control Module 1 Not Used 12 Interior Lights 2 Cigarette Lighter. Ashtray Lamp 6 Steering Wheel Radio Controls 7 Headlamps Switch. Body Control Module. Instrument Panel Cluster 5 Parking Lamps.

check to see that it matches the fuse block in your vehicle. HVAC I (Automatic). See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for more 23 Rear Wiper information on location. HVAC Sensors (Automatic) The engine compartment fuse block is located under the 22 Anti-Lock Brakes hood on the driver’s side of the vehicle. use the fuse block picture and chart located later in this section. push in and turn the fastener clockwise. To reinstall the fuse panel cover. Transmission) 16 Supplemental Inflatable Restraint 17 Front Wiper 18 Steering Wheel Radio Controls 19 Radio. Engine Controls (VCM. Remove the cover by turning the fastener counterclockwise. PCM. Ignition picture and chart. If the fuse block pictured here is different than your vehicle’s. Battery 20 Amplifier 21 HVAC (Manual). Before using this fuse block 24 Radio. 6-68 .Fuse/Circuit Usage Engine Compartment Fuse Block Breaker 14 Power Locks Motor 15 4WD Switch.

Oil Pressure TRL B/U Trailer Back Up Lamps ABS Anti-Lock Brake System VEH B/U Vehicle Back Up Lamps ECM I Engine Control Module Injectors 6-69 . TRL TRN Trailer Left Turn CAM. Fuel Pump Module. PURGE. Name Usage RT TURN Right Turn Signal Front LT TURN Left Turn Signal Front HDLP W/W Not Used LT TRN Left Turn Signal Rear RT TRN Right Turn Signal Rear RR PRK Right Rear Parking Lamps TRL PRK Trailer Park Lamps LTHDLP Left Headlamp RTHDLP Right Headlamp FRPRK Front Parking Lamps INT BAT I/P Fuse Block Feed Name Usage ENG I Engine Sensors/Solenoids. VENT TRR TRN Trailer Right Turn ECM B Engine Control Module. MAF.

3. IGN 2. PRNDL HORN Horn HTDSEAT Heated Seat BTSI Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System HVAC HVAC System B/U LP Back Up Lamps TRCHMSL Trailer Center High Mount Stop Light IGN B Column Feed. Fuel Pump. Door Locks Stop Lamp FOG LP Fog Lamps HTDMIR Heated Mirror IGN A Starting and Charging IGN 1 ATC Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive) STUD #2 Accessory Feeds. NSBU Switch OXYSEN Oxygen Sensor HAZLP Hazard Lamps IGN E Engine VECHMSL Vehicle Center High-Mounted MIR/LKS Mirrors. 4 RRDFOG Rear Defogger RAP Retained Accessory Power TBC Truck Body Computer LD LEV Not Used CRANK Clutch Switch. Electric Brake STOPLP Stop Lamps PARKLP Parking Lamps RR W/W Rear Window Wiper 6-70 .Name Usage Name Usage A/C Air Conditioning LR PRK Left Rear Parking Lamps W/W PMP Not Used IGN C Starter Solenoid.

. . . . . . please consult Tire Pressure . . . . . . 1-6-5-4-3-2 Halogen Headlamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005 HB3 Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . V6 Halogen Headlamps. . your dealer. . . . . . . 195_F (91_C) Taillamps 3057 Spark Plug Gap . . . . 100 lb-ft (140 N·m) *For replacement bulbs not listed here. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index. . . . . . . . . . . . 0. . 6-71 . . . . .52 mm) Front Sidemarker Lamps 194 NA Wheels and Tires Turn Signal Lamps 3457A Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . .060 inches (1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Replacement Bulbs * Capacities and Specifications Lamps Number Engine Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006 HB4 or Composite Low Beam VIN Code . . . See the Certification/Tire label. . . . . . . . 190 at 4. W 9006LL Firing Order . . .400 rpm Composite High Beam Thermostat Specification . . . . . . . “VORTEC” 4300 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 19. . . . . . . .0 L) *All capacities are approximate. . .3 L) that service work on your air conditioning system be Engine Oil with Filter* . . . R134a Systems Rear . . . It is recommended Manual Trans.0 L) Fuel Tank (4-Door Models) . If you do your own service work. 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 L) performed by a qualified technician. 1. 5. . . . .Capacities Air Conditioning Refrigerant Please refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” Capacity in the Index for more information. .2 L) Fuel Tank (2-Door Models) . . . .79 kg) Differential Fluid* Use Refrigerant Oil. .0 pints (1. (. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Transmission Air Conditioning (Drain and Refill)* . . After refill.7 L) Refrigerant R134a .0 U. . . .8 lbs. . . .9 quarts (11. you’ll need the proper Cooling System* service manual. . See “Doing Your Own Service Work” in Automatic Trans. gallons (72. . 2. . . . . . .1 L) the Index for additional information. the level must be checked. . . . .7 quarts (11. . gallons (68. . . . . . . . .S.0 U. . . 6-72 . . . 11. . . .S. . . . 18. . 4. . .6 pints (1. . . . . . . . . . .5 quarts (4. . . . . . 4.0 quarts (4. .9 L) Front . . .

. GF481 Front Windshield Wiper Blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trico 14 inches (35.6 cm) *ACDelcoR Part No. . . . . . . . 24200796 when it was built. . . . . and are subject to change. 6-73 . . . . . . . . PF52 Replacement part numbers listed in this section are Air Cleaner Filter* .Normal Maintenance Thermostat** . . . . . PF47 (PF52 Optional) Oil Filter* (4-Wheel Drive) . Fuel Filter* . . . . . . please Spark Plugs* . . . . .8 cm) Backglass Wiper Blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CV769C manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle Automatic Transmission Filter Kit** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . or if you have any questions. . **GM Part No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trico 20 inches (50. . . . A1163C based on the latest information available at the time of printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12559051 Replacement Parts Oil Filter* (2-Wheel Drive) . 41-932 contact your GM dealer. . . . . If a part listed in this PCV Valve* . . . . . .

dependability and emission control performance. 7-2 Introduction 7-44 Part B: Owner Checks and Services 7-4 Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services 7-50 Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections 7-8 Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance 7-52 Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7-31 Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance 7-55 Part E: Maintenance Record 7- 7-1 . Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety. Section 7 Maintenance Schedule This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle.

and to keep your vehicle in good condition. please maintain your vehicle properly. but also helps the environment. 7-2 . Maintenance Requirements Maintenance intervals. To help protect our environment. inspections and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good supplements your new vehicle warranties. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Introduction Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle. Any damage caused by failure to Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer follow recommended maintenance may not be covered for details. checks. All recommended maintenance procedures are important. See your working condition. by warranty.

what to have done and how often. Keep your maintenance work only if you have the required know-how receipts. should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done. Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. “Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists some recommended products necessary to help keep CAUTION: your vehicle properly maintained. see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. It also explains This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts: what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in “Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains good condition. so unless you are technically important inspections that your dealer’s service qualified and have the necessary equipment. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle and the proper tools and equipment for the job.How This Section is Organized “Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what should be checked and when. have a qualified technician do the work. for warranty repairs. If you want to get the service information. Do your own maintenance you to record and keep track of the maintenance performed on your vehicle. In trying to do some jobs. you should department or another qualified service center let your dealer’s service department or another qualified should perform. or their equivalents. Some of these “Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains services can be complex. 7-3 . These products. If you have any doubt. you can “Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for be seriously injured. service center do these jobs.

If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good D use the recommended fuel. See “Loading Your Vehicle” You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. So please read the Vehicle” in the Index. you’ll know right for your vehicle. driving limits. maintenance needs vary. You may drive very short D carry passengers and cargo within recommended distances only a few times a week. in the Index. We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition. to do errands or in many D are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal other ways.Part A: Scheduled The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Part D. 7-4 . Or you may drive it to work. dusty weather. See “Off-Road Driving With Your Four-Wheel-Drive frequent checks and replacements. see your dealer. condition. If you First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is go to your dealer for your service needs. All parts should be replaced and all Using Your Maintenance Schedule necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle. Certification/Tire label. Or you may drive limits. You may need more D are driven off-road in the recommended manner. following and note how you drive. See “Fuel” in the Index. Make sure whoever services your vehicle Maintenance Services uses these. Here’s how to decide which that GM-trained and supported service people will schedule to follow: perform the work using genuine GM parts. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s long distances all the time in very hot. But we don’t know These schedules are for vehicles that: exactly how you’ll drive it. Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles. Selecting the Right Schedule This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them.

whichever occurs first). Every 6.000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner or other commercial application. Automatic Transmission Service your vehicle. D Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent Every 15.Scheduled Maintenance Short Trip/City Definition Short Trip/City Intervals Follow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance if Every 3. One of the reasons you should follow this schedule Every 50. police. (severe conditions only). whichever occurs first). (Continued) 7-5 . if driving in dusty D You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of conditions. down sooner. Filter Replacement. taxi Every 30.000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air driving in stop-and-go traffic).000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic if you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions Transmission Service (normal conditions). Automatic is that these conditions cause engine oil to break Transfer Case Only: Transfer Case Fluid Change.000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation. below freezing.000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle: Change (or 3 months. This is Lubrication (or 3 months. Chassis D Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). Fuel Filter Replacement. Cleaner Filter Inspection. particularly important when outside temperatures are Drive Axle Service. D If the vehicle is used for delivery service.

Spark Plug Replacement. Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance on the following pages.000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire Maintenance are true. Every 150. whichever occurs first). Positive vehicle is used for trailer towing. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions will cause engine oil to break These intervals only summarize maintenance services. conditions from the Short Trip/City Scheduled Every 100. down slower. or used off paved roads.000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of the Drive Belt Inspection.Scheduled Maintenance Short Trip/City Intervals Long Trip/Highway Definition Every 60. 7-6 . Do not use this schedule if the Inspection.000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System Service (or every 60 months. Use the Short Trip/City schedule for these conditions. driven in a dusty area Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.

whichever occurs first). Engine Air Cleaner Filter Replacement. Transfer Case Only: Transfer Case Fluid Change. These intervals only summarize maintenance services.000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory Change (or every 12 months.000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance Transmission Service (normal conditions). Replacement. Drive Axle Service.000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire occurs first). 7-7 . Chassis Lubrication (or every 12 months.Scheduled Maintenance Long Trip/Highway Intervals Long Trip/Highway Intervals Every 7. Inspection.000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter Service (or every 60 months. Spark Plug Replacement. Transmission Service (severe conditions only).000 Miles (25 000 km): Automatic Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection. Drive Belt Inspection. Automatic on the following pages. whichever Every 100. Every 150. whichever occurs first).500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter Every 60. Every 50. Positive Every 15.000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System Every 30. Tire Rotation.

S. We.000 miles + A good time to check your brakes is during tire (240 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval rotation. ball joints. D More frequent lubrication may be required for urge that all recommended maintenance services be heavy-duty or off-road use. If driving [ The U. however. drain fluid the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to and refill at first engine oil change. failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify D If your vehicle has a locking differential. The services shown at 150. steering (166 000 km) should be repeated after 100.000 miles (240 000 km) for the life of “Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this vehicle. Environmental Protection Agency or the in dusty areas or when towing a trailer.000 miles linkage. 7-8 . this vehicle. performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded. See “Recommended Fluids and Maintenance Inspections” following. this schedule. See “Brake System Inspection” under after 150. Lubricants” in the Index for proper lubricant to use: Footnotes D Check fluid level and add fluid as needed. the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic ** Drive axle service. Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance The services shown in this schedule up to 100. drain fluid California Air Resources Board has determined that the and refill every 15. propshaft splines. parking brake cable guides.000 miles # Lubricate the front suspension.000 miles (25 000 km). (166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of universal joints and brake pedal springs.

whichever occurs first). (See footnote **. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote +.) 7-9 . Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote #. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.) 6.) j Rotate tires.000 Miles (5 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. whichever occurs first). (See footnote **.000 Miles (10 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance 3. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. whichever occurs first). See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. (See footnote #. whichever occurs first).

) 12. whichever occurs first). Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.000 Miles (15 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. whichever occurs first).) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote #. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires.) 7-10 . whichever occurs first). (See footnote +. whichever occurs first). Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service.000 Miles (20 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance 9. (See footnote **. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months.

DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. police or delivery service. Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance 15. (See footnote **. – In hilly or mountainous terrain.) j Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.000 Miles (25 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. 7-11 . An Emission Control Service. whichever occurs first). – When doing frequent trailer towing.) j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: – In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher. – Uses such as found in taxi. (See footnote [. (See footnote #. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions.000 miles (83 000 km). Replace filter if necessary. change the fluid and filter every 50. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. whichever occurs first).

000 Miles (30 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. (See footnote #. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. whichever occurs first). j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.000 Miles (35 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote #. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance 18. (See footnote +. (See footnote **.) 7-12 . DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service.) 21.) j Rotate tires. whichever occurs first).) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. whichever occurs first). whichever occurs first).

) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. (See footnote +. (See footnote #.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.000 Miles (40 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. (See footnote #. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.000 Miles (45 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months.) 27. whichever occurs first). whichever occurs first). Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance 24. (See footnote **. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. whichever occurs first). (See footnote **.) j Rotate tires. whichever occurs first). DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service.) 7-13 .

) j Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service. – When doing frequent trailer towing.) 7-14 . j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. police or delivery service.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions. – Uses such as found in taxi. whichever occurs first). DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information.) j Replace engine air cleaner filter.000 Miles (50 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. – In hilly or mountainous terrain. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance 30. (See footnote [. whichever occurs first). change the fluid and filter every 50.000 miles (83 000 km). An Emission Control Service. j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: – In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher. (See footnote +. j Rotate tires. (See footnote #. (See footnote **.

DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. whichever occurs first). j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 36. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote +. (See footnote **. Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance 33.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed.) j Rotate tires.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed.000 Miles (60 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.000 Miles (55 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. (See footnote #. whichever occurs first). whichever occurs first).) 7-15 . See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote **. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service.

(See footnote #. whichever occurs first). j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. (See footnote **. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months.) j Rotate tires. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. whichever occurs first).000 Miles (70 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. whichever occurs first). (See footnote **. (See footnote +.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. whichever occurs first).) 42.000 Miles (65 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. (See footnote #. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance 39.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed.) 7-16 . DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service.

police or delivery service. – In hilly or mountainous terrain. (See footnote **. Replace filter if necessary. (See footnote [. Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance 45. j Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.000 Miles (75 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months.000 miles (83 000 km). If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions. An Emission Control Service.) j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: – In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. whichever occurs first). change the fluid and filter every 50. (See footnote #. whichever occurs first).) 7-17 . – When doing frequent trailer towing. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. – Uses such as found in taxi.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed.

(See footnote +. whichever occurs first).000 Miles (83 000 km) j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: previously and.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service.) 50. haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid. therefore. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. change both the fluid and filter.) j Rotate tires. (See footnote #. j Automatic Transfer Case Only: Change transfer case fluid. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance 48. (See footnote **. whichever occurs first). Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change. 7-18 .000 Miles (80 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information.

Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service.000 Miles (85 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. (See footnote +.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed.) 7-19 . (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. (See footnote #. (See footnote **. Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance 51. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. whichever occurs first). whichever occurs first). Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **. whichever occurs first). DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information.000 Miles (90 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. whichever occurs first).) 54.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed.

000 Miles (100 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. whichever occurs first). whichever occurs first). DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance 57.) 60. whichever occurs first).000 Miles (95 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. (See footnote **. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote #.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed.) 7-20 . (See footnote **. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.

j Replace fuel filter. change the fluid and filter every 50. j Inspect engine accessory drive belt.) j Replace engine air cleaner filter. – Uses such as found in taxi. police or delivery service.) 7-21 . Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: – In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher.000 miles (83 000 km). (See footnote +. – When doing frequent trailer towing. (See footnote [. An Emission Control Service. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions. An Emission Control Service. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. – In hilly or mountainous terrain. j Rotate tires. An Emission Control Service.

) 7-22 . Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed.) 66. (See footnote #. Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance 63. (See footnote #. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.) j Rotate tires. whichever occurs first). whichever occurs first). (See footnote **. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months.000 Miles (110 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information.000 Miles (105 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. (See footnote **. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. (See footnote +. whichever occurs first). whichever occurs first).) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service.

See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information.000 Miles (115 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. whichever occurs first). Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed.) 7-23 . DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. (See footnote **. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. (See footnote +.) 72. (See footnote #. whichever occurs first). (See footnote #. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance 69. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service.000 Miles (120 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months.) j Rotate tires. (See footnote **. whichever occurs first). whichever occurs first).

whichever occurs first).) j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: – In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher. Replace filter if necessary. (See footnote #. – When doing frequent trailer towing. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. change the fluid and filter every 50.000 Miles (125 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. (See footnote **. whichever occurs first). Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance 75.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. j Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. An Emission Control Service. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions.) 7-24 . – Uses such as found in taxi. (See footnote [. – In hilly or mountainous terrain. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. police or delivery service.000 miles (83 000 km).

whichever occurs first). Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance 78. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.000 Miles (135 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. (See footnote #.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed.) j Rotate tires. (See footnote **. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.) 7-25 .) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote #. whichever occurs first). whichever occurs first). (See footnote +.) 81.000 Miles (130 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. whichever occurs first). See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. (See footnote **.

whichever occurs first).000 Miles (140 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. (See footnote +. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.000 Miles (145 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. whichever occurs first). j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. (See footnote **. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. (See footnote #. Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance 84.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.) 87. (See footnote **.) j Rotate tires. whichever occurs first). whichever occurs first).) 7-26 .) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote #.

) 7-27 . (See footnote +.000 Miles (150 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. An Emission Control Service. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. whichever occurs first).) j Replace engine air cleaner filter. j Replace fuel filter. (See footnote **. whichever occurs first). – Uses such as found in taxi. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions. (See footnote #. Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance 90. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. police or delivery service. – When doing frequent trailer towing. (See footnote [. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. j Rotate tires.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed.) j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: – In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher.000 miles (83 000 km). – In hilly or mountainous terrain. change the fluid and filter every 50.

whichever occurs first). (See footnote #. whichever occurs first). (See footnote +. (See footnote **. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information.000 Miles (160 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months.) 96.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.) j Rotate tires. (See footnote #. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. whichever occurs first).000 Miles (155 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. whichever occurs first). Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.) 7-28 . Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance 93.

whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.000 Miles (165 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months.) 100. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change. j Automatic Transfer Case Only: Change transfer case fluid. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. 7-29 . An Emission Control Service. Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance 99. (See footnote #.000 Miles (166 000 km) j Inspect spark plug wires. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months. j Replace spark plugs. (See footnote **. therefore. change both the fluid and filter. whichever occurs first). haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and. j Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service.

condenser. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.000 Miles (240 000 km) j Drain. 7-30 . pressure cap and neck. An Emission Control Service. flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: whichever occurs first). Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance 150. Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator.

steering (166 000 km) should be repeated after 100. propshaft splines. drain fluid California Air Resources Board has determined that the and refill at first engine oil change. See “Recommended Fluids and Maintenance Inspections” following. parking brake cable guides.S. Lubricants” in the Index for proper lubricant to use: Footnotes D Check fluid level and add fluid as needed. 7-31 . The services shown at 150. this vehicle. however.000 miles # Lubricate the front suspension. Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance The services shown in this schedule up to 100. failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. (166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of universal joints and brake pedal springs. ball joints.000 miles + A good time to check your brakes is during tire (240 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval rotation. Environmental Protection Agency or the D If your vehicle has a locking differential. See “Brake System Inspection” under after 150.000 miles (240 000 km) for the life of “Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this vehicle. We.000 miles linkage. urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded. See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic ** Drive axle service. [ The U. this schedule.

) 7-32 . See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote #. Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance 7.) 15. whichever occurs first). j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service.) j Rotate tires. whichever occurs first).500 Miles (12 500 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months. (See footnote **.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service.000 Miles (25 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months. whichever occurs first). whichever occurs first). Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **. (See footnote #. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months. (See footnote +.

– When doing frequent trailer towing. change the fluid and filter every 50. ACTUAL SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. – Uses such as found in taxi. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.) 7-33 . (See footnote +. whichever occurs first). (See footnote **. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months.) j Rotate tires. Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: – In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher.000 miles (83 000 km). See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. whichever occurs first). police or delivery service. – In hilly or mountainous terrain.) 22.500 Miles (37 500 km) DATE j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months. j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote #. (See footnote +.

See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. whichever occurs first). whichever occurs first). (See footnote [.) j Replace fuel filter. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months.000 miles (83 000 km). – Uses such as found in taxi. (See footnote #. police or delivery service. – In hilly or mountainous terrain.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote +. 7-34 . – When doing frequent trailer towing. Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance 30. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.) j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: – In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher. An Emission Control Service. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions. (See footnote **.) j Replace engine air cleaner filter.000 Miles (50 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months. change the fluid and filter every 50. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. j Rotate tires. An Emission Control Service.

) j Rotate tires. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **. (See footnote #. (See footnote **. (See footnote +.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. whichever occurs first). DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. whichever occurs first). whichever occurs first). j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months.) (Continued) 7-35 . Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance 37.500 Miles (62 500 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months.000 Miles (75 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. whichever occurs first). j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months. (See footnote #.) 45. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service.

000 miles (83 000 km). haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid. change the fluid and filter every 50. (See footnote +.000 Miles (75 000 km) (Continued) j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: – In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher.) 50. police or delivery service. – When doing frequent trailer towing. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. j Rotate tires. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions. 7-36 . – In hilly or mountainous terrain. ACTUAL SERVICED BY: therefore. – Uses such as found in taxi. j Automatic Transfer Case Only: Change transfer case fluid. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change.000 Miles (83 000 km) DATE j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe conditions listed previously and. change both the MILEAGE fluid and filter. Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance 45.

whichever occurs first). Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information.000 Miles (100 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months. Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance 52.) 60.) (Continued) 7-37 .500 Miles (87 500 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. whichever occurs first). Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months.) j Rotate tires. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **. (See footnote #. whichever occurs first). (See footnote +. (See footnote #. whichever occurs first).

000 miles (83 000 km). 7-38 . change the fluid and filter every 50. – Uses such as found in taxi.) j Replace engine air cleaner filter. police or delivery service. Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance 60.) j Inspect engine accessory drive belt. – When doing frequent trailer towing. – In hilly or mountainous terrain.000 Miles (100 000 km) (Continued) j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: – In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions. j Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service. j Rotate tires. (See footnote [. (See footnote +. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service.

whichever occurs first).) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months. (See footnote #. Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance 67. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. whichever occurs first). (See footnote #. (See footnote **. (See footnote +.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed.) 75. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.) j Rotate tires. whichever occurs first). (See footnote **.000 Miles (125 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service.) (Continued) 7-39 . whichever occurs first). See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information.500 Miles (112 500 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months.

) 82. (See footnote +. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions. (See footnote +. (See footnote #. whichever occurs first). change the fluid and filter every 50. Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance 75. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months. – In hilly or mountainous terrain. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. police or delivery service. whichever occurs first).) j Rotate tires.500 Miles (137 500 km) DATE j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. ACTUAL SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. – When doing frequent trailer towing. – Uses such as found in taxi.) 7-40 . (See footnote **.000 miles (83 000 km).000 Miles (125 000 km) (Continued) j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: – In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher.

DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. (See footnote **. j Rotate tires.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. police or delivery service. change the fluid and filter every 50. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions. j Replace fuel filter. – In hilly or mountainous terrain. whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance 90. An Emission Control Service.) j Replace engine air cleaner filter. whichever occurs first).000 miles (83 000 km). j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months.) 7-41 . – Uses such as found in taxi. – When doing frequent trailer towing. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote [.000 Miles (150 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months. (See footnote #.) j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: – In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote +.

therefore. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote +. whichever occurs first). Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance 97. (See footnote **.) j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and.000 Miles (166 000 km) j Inspect spark plug wires.) j Rotate tires. whichever occurs first). j Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve. change both the fluid and filter. j Automatic Transfer Case Only: Change transfer case fluid. haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid. 7-42 . DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service.) 100. j Replace spark plugs. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service.500 Miles (162 500 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months. An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change. (See footnote #.

See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use. pressure cap and neck. Clean radiator.000 Miles (240 000 km) j Drain. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: whichever occurs first). Inspect hoses. flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service. Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance 150. condenser. 7-43 .

See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index for further details. necessary. performance of your vehicle. 7-44 . Cleaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play. as shown windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if in Part D.Part B: Owner Checks and Services Engine Coolant Level Check Listed in this part are owner checks and services which Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOLR should be performed at the intervals specified to help coolant mixture if necessary. dependability and emission control the Index for further details. Cassette Deck Service Clean cassette deck. Tire Inflation Check Engine Oil Level Check Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures. See “Tires” in the Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if Index for further details. make sure they are the proper ones. Don’t forget to check your spare tire. See “Engine Coolant” in ensure the safety. See “Audio Systems” in the Index for further details. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your Check the windshield washer fluid level in the vehicle. necessary. At Each Fuel Fill At Least Once a Month It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for further details. Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.

latch plates. and not stick or squeak. have it Tools” in the Index. If you see anything that might to tighten the cable. repaired. use the wheel wrench safety belt system parts. Weatherstrip Lubrication Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings. make sure that the belts. Wiper Blade Check damp weather more frequent application may be Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. retractors and anchorages are spare tire is stored securely. During very cold. pull. miss areas of the windshield. If it moves. Cleaning” in the Index. Also see “Wiper Blades. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or in the Index. (The air bag system Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last does not need regular maintenance. Push. seal better. and then try to working properly. See “Storing the Spare Tire and keep a safety belt system from doing its job.At Least Twice a Year Spare Tire Check At least twice a year. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. buckles. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth.) longer. 7-45 . and have them repaired or replaced. Look for any other loose or damaged rotate or turn the tire. after the monthly inflation check Restraint System Check of the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your the correct tire inflation pressure. Replace blade required.

Have Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant the system inspected and repaired if needed. Check the system and door hinges. outer repair if needed. tailgate mounted spare tire (if equipped). See Part D tells you what to use. A fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. add if needed. Check for leaks. fuel door hinge. 7-46 . endgate hinges. console Hydraulic Clutch System Check doors. glove box. spring anchor. tailgate handle pivot points. tailgate hinges. Have the system environment. See Key Lock Cylinders Service “Manual Transmission Fluid” in the Index. moving seat hardware and folding seat hardware. add if needed. loss may indicate a problem. “Automatic Transmission Fluid” in the Index. More frequent lubrication “Hydraulic Clutch Fluid” in the Index. hood latch assembly. specified in Part D. Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir.Manual Transmission Check At Least Once a Year Check the transmission fluid level. release pawl. Automatic Transmission Check Body Lubrication Service Check the transmission fluid level. A fluid loss in may be required when exposed to a corrosive this system could indicate a problem. A fluid secondary latch. See Lubricate all hood hinges. pivots. inspected and repaired at once.

On automatic transmission vehicles.Starter Switch Check 3. the vehicle could in NEUTRAL (N). The starter should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). put the shift lever When you are doing this check. 7-47 . 2. Do not use the accelerator pedal. If the starter works in CAUTION: any other position. On manual transmission vehicles. Follow the steps below. try to start the engine in each gear. push the clutch down halfway move suddenly. The starter should work injured. If the starter works when the clutch isn’t pushed all the way down. If it does. Before you start. be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. your vehicle needs service. you or others could be and try to start the engine. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake. See “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary. 1. your vehicle needs service. and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts. only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to the floor.

injured.Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control 3. With the engine off. but don’t start the engine. Without applying the regular brake. the key should turn to level surface. Before you start. D With an automatic transmission. It should be parked on a D With a manual transmission. Follow the steps below. Ignition Transmission Lock Check When you are doing this check. try to turn the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position. turn the key to the RUN System Check position. LOCK only when you press the key release button. If the shift lever CAUTION: moves out of PARK (P). in the Index if necessary. the vehicle could move suddenly. the key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P). be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. 7-48 . Firmly apply the parking brake. try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If it does. the key should come out only in LOCK. 1. Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move. 2. your vehicle needs service. and with the parking brake set. See “Parking Brake” On all vehicles. you or others could be While parked.

regular brake. use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody.Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission Park on a fairly steep hill. 7-49 . Make D To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case ability: With the engine running. set the parking brake. Be ready to apply the regular Then release the parking brake followed by the brake at once should the vehicle begin to move. D To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With CAUTION: the engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL (N). with the vehicle facing PARK (P) Mechanism Check downhill. slowly remove foot pressure from When you are doing this check. it begins to roll. Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring. Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect. injured and property could be damaged. Keeping your foot on the regular brake. Do this until the vehicle is could begin to move. You or others could be held by the parking brake only. shift to PARK (P). your vehicle the regular brake pedal.

Inspect all pipes. You should let your dealer’s cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let service department or other qualified service center exhaust fumes into the vehicle. binding. etc. 7-50 . Proper procedures to perform these services may be Fuel System Inspection found in a service manual. Publications” in the Index. should be performed at least twice a year (for instance. Look for broken. Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering fittings and clamps. signs of of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. system and pressure cap is recommended at least once cracks. Clean and then inspect the drive a year. loose or missing parts. Inspect the power steering ensure proper operation. tears or leakage. Listed in this part are inspections and services which missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams. Replace seals if necessary. loose connections or other conditions which could each spring and fall). Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked. To help wear or lack of lubrication. swollen or deteriorated. replace as needed. Inspect the body near the exhaust system. Make sure any necessary repairs are the Index. axle boot seals for damage. See “Service and Owner Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks. leaks. Clean the outside system for damaged. Engine Cooling System Inspection Steering. chafing. completed at once. damaged. holes. See “Engine Exhaust” in do these jobs.Part C: Periodic Maintenance Exhaust System Inspection Inspections Inspect the complete exhaust system. a pressure test of the cooling lines and hoses for proper hook-up.

Inspect brake lines and and for damaged or missing parts. parking brake. 7-51 . binding. Inspect the complete system.Throttle System Inspection Brake System Inspection Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding. check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant when necessary. Replace any components that have high effort chafing. if needed. needed. Check parking brake adjustment. Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation. Do not lubricate accelerator and for surface condition. etc. Every 12 months or at engine oil change intervals. check and have it repaired. etc. Replace parts as hoses for proper hook-up. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. cruise control cables. More frequent lubrication may be required on off-road use. including calipers. Inspect other brake parts. cracks. leaks. You may need to have your brakes Transfer Case and Front Axle inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions (Four-Wheel Drive) Inspection result in frequent braking. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors or excessive wear.

7-52 . 12377967 or part number or specification may be obtained from equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid). Windshield USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT Washer Solvent Solvent (GM Part No. determine the preferred viscosity Parking Brake Chassis Lubricant (GM Part for your vehicle’s engine. 1051515) or equivalent. Coolant. lubricant meeting requirements Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean. Brake System (GM Part No. See “Engine Coolant” in 1050017 . 12377985 or equivalent) or “Engine Oil” in the Index.1 quart. 12345347 or of the proper viscosity.Part D: Recommended Fluids and USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT Delco Supreme 11R Brake Fluid Lubricants Hydraulic Fluids and lubricants identified below by name. drinkable of NLGI # 2. GM OptikleenR Washer your dealer. the Index. To equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid). GoodwrenchR DEX-COOLR or HavolineR DEX-COOLR Power GM Power Steering Fluid Steering System (GM Part No. see Cable Guides No. Category LB water and use only GM or GC-LB.1 pint. or equivalent). Engine Oil Engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Hydraulic Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Clutch System (GM Part No. 1052884 .

USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT Manual Synchromesh Transmission Fluid Rear Axle Axle Lubricant. use only GM Part Transmission (GM Part No. Lubrication No. Joints of NLGI # 2. 1052271 or equivalent). 12377985 or equivalent) or of NLGI # 2. Category LB and Universal lubricant meeting requirements or GC-LB. 12345349 or (Locking No. (GM Part No. 12378508). 12378508). 12346241 or equivalent). Automatic DEXRONR-III Automatic Transfer Case AUTO-TRAK II Fluid Transmission Transmission Fluid. Axle (Standard Part No. Electronic DEXRONR-III Automatic Cylinders SuperlubeR (GM Part Transfer Case Transmission Fluid. Differential) 7-53 . No. Key Lock Multi-Purpose Lubricant. Automatic AUTO-TRAK II Fluid Chassis Chassis Lubricant (GM Part Transfer Case (GM Part No. Do not add friction equivalent). 1052271. Category LB Front and Rear SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant (GM or GC-LB. 12377985 or equivalent) or Rear Driveline Chassis Lubricant (GM Part lubricant meeting requirements Center Spline No. Differential) modifier.

Tailgate Multi-Purpose Lubricant. 12346241 or equivalent). Outer Joint lubricant meeting requirements Tailgate Handle of NLGI # 2. Squeaks SuperlubeR (GM Part Release Pawl No. (GM Part No. equivalent) or lubricant meeting Pivots. to Clutch Fork No. 12377985 or equivalent) or Hinges SuperlubeR (GM Part Universal Joint lubricant meeting requirements No. 7-54 . 12346241 or equivalent). 12346293 or Conditioning Part No. Anchor and Category LB or GC-LB. 12371287 or equivalent). Clutch Pushrod Chassis Lubricant (GM Part Mounted Spare SuperlubeR (GM Part Tire Carrier (if No. of NLGI # 2. Weatherstrip Synthetic Grease with Teflon. Velocity No. Spring requirements of NLGI # 2. Hinges Hood Latch LubriplateR Lubricant Aerosol Weatherstrip Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Assembly. Category LB Pivot Points and or GC-LB.USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT Constant Chassis Lubricant (GM Part Hood and Door Multi-Purpose Lubricant. Secondary Latch. Category LB or GC-LB. 12345579 or equivalent). 12377985 or equivalent) or equipped).

Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED 7-55 . record the date. you should retain all maintenance receipts. odometer reading and who performed the service in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval. Also.Part E: Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed. Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them. Any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on the following record pages.

Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED 7-56 .

Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED 7-57 .

Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED 7-58 .

This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects. Section 8 Customer Assistance Information Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. 8-2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 8-8 Courtesy Transportation 8-4 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone 8-10 Warranty Information (TTY) Users 8-10 Reporting Safety Defects to the United 8-4 Customer Assistance Offices States Government 8-5 GM Mobility Program for Persons 8-11 Reporting Safety Defects to the with Disabilities Canadian Government 8-6 Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program 8-11 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors 8-8 Canadian Roadside Assistance 8- 8-1 .

contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager. Normally. service or parts manager. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction. however. Normally. Sometimes.Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Chevrolet. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales. the following steps should be taken: STEP ONE -. any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service departments.Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. despite the best intentions of all concerned. 8-2 . misunderstandings can occur. concerns can be quickly resolved at that level.

In Canada.If after contacting a member of STEP THREE -. to you.) Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action. any additional rights you may have. contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the calling 1-800-222-1020. or the plate to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or at the top left of the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. please remember that and proceed with any other venue for relief available your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. 8-3 . contact GM of Canada procedure outlined in Steps One and Two. you should Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling file with the GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). it appears your concern cannot dealer are committed to making sure you are be resolved by the dealership without further help. Please have the Information booklet for information on the Canadian following information available to give the Customer Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern. Assistance Representative: The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program D Vehicle Identification Number (This is available administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus from the vehicle registration or title. If you do not agree with the decision given in your case. However.STEP TWO -. completely satisfied with your new vehicle. through the windshield.Both General Motors and your dealership management. you may reject it When contacting Chevrolet. D Dealership name and location use of the program is free of charge and your case will D Vehicle delivery date and present mileage generally be heard within 40 days. Canadian owners We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance to give your inquiry prompt attention.

S. Inc.) 8-4 . hard of hearing. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994 Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. or 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs). MI 48232-5170 right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue 1-800-222-1020 its participation in this program. customer wishes to write Council of Better Business Bureaus.S. 1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USAR (243-8872) Customer Assistance for Text From: Telephone (TTY) Users Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) To assist customers who are deaf. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age. (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830. to Chevrolet.O. Any TTY user can communicate Fax Number: 313-381-0022 with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone Customer Assistance Offices number or write them at the following address: Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free BBB Auto Line number for assistance. the letter should be addressed to Chevrolet’s 4200 Wilson Boulevard Customer Assistance Center. P. VA 22203-1804 United States Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 Chevrolet Motor Division This program is available in all 50 states and the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center District of Columbia. General Motors reserves the Detroit. If a U. U. Box 33170 mileage and other factors. Suite 800 Arlington.

for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle Customer Assistance Center purchase/lease.000 1-800-263-7854 (French) toward aftermarket driver 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) or passenger adaptive Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800 equipment you may require for your vehicle (hand All Overseas Locations controls. Long Distance: 011-52 . Central America and Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and This program can also provide you with free resource information. wheelchair/scooter lifts. S.P. such as area driver assessment centers and U. All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830. See your dealer for more details or call Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. 11910. Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.Canada GM Mobility Program for Persons General Motors of Canada Limited with Disabilities Customer Communication Centre. 163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive This program.F. Lomas de Bezares Text telephone (TTY) users.). call 1-800-833-9935. please dial 1-905-644-3063. Mexico. can 1-800-263-3777 (English) reimburse you up to $1. de R.V.S. 8-5 . available to Oshawa. Ontario L1H 8P7 qualified applicants. Mexico. etc. D. GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. C.L. Col.53 29 0 800 When calling from outside Canada. 01-800-508-0000 Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. The program is available General Motors de Mexico. de C. Virgin Islands) mobility equipment installers.

however some services may incur costs. establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance glass repair. etc. locksmith/key service. call 1-888-889-2438 D Free towing for warranty repairs D Basic over-the-phone technical advice To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer D Available dealer services at reasonable costs satisfaction. by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872).) Center. If your problem cannot be resolved over the phone. 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872). Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer. membership in Roadside Assistance is free.Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day.. 365 days a year. Roadside membership is free. wrecker services. Chevrolet is excited to announce the (i.e. Basic Care and Courtesy Care: Roadside Basic Care provides: D Toll-free number. our advisors have access to a nationwide network of dealer recommended service providers. 8-6 . This toll-free number will provide you over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor mechanical problems. text telephone (TTY) users. As the owner of a 2002 Chevrolet.

All Courtesy Care services D FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer must be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer from a legal roadway) service management. D FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on the road) The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers that will provide you with quality and priority service. to eligible purchasers of 2002 Chevrolet passenger cars and light duty trucks. Courtesy Transportation will When roadside services are required. our advisors will be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by explain any payment obligations that may be incurred the Bumper-to-Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty for utilizing outside services.) 8-7 .Roadside Courtesy Care provides: Courtesy Care is available to retail and retail lease D Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined previously) customers operating 2002 and newer Chevrolet vehicles Plus: for a period of 3 years/36. needing warranty service. (Please see your selling dealer for details. whichever occurs first. D FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are lost Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or on the road or locked inside) included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle D FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road) Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to D FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road) modify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care at any time.000 miles (60 000 km).

8-8 . the problem is safety-related. let them know this. By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs. a customer D Vehicle color support program for new vehicles. This will reduce your inconvenience during Canadian Roadside Assistance warranty repairs. Several transportation D Description of problem options are available when warranty repairs are required. please call your dealership. you Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book or should contact your dealer and request an appointment. If it is. please have the Courtesy Transportation following available to give to the advisor: Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value D Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) in its offering of motor vehicles. keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service. unless. To enhance your D License plate number ownership experience.For prompt assistance when calling. we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation. of course. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately. your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere Plan Ahead When Possible in Canada or the United States. and ask for instructions. Please refer to the When your vehicle requires warranty service. D Vehicle location The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to D Telephone number where you can be reached retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the D Vehicle mileage New Vehicle Limited Warranty. call 1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.

In addition. at actual cost. excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the to get you to your destination with minimal interruption completion of the repair. such as taxi or bus. local and rental vehicle transportation options. etc. However. your dealer may arrange to provide Transportation Options you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle you obtained. warranty repairs. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts. arrange transportation through a friend or relative. This includes a one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership. you are urged to do so as early in the When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight work day as possible to allow for same day repair. of your daily schedule. You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes.If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle Courtesy Rental Vehicle off for service. Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service usage fees. levies. insurance coverage. wait. Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs. Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a courtesy rental. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to Assistance Information” furnished with each new $10 per day (five day maximum) may be available. should you but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. up to Warranty service can generally be completed while you a maximum of $30. provider requirements. Requirements vary and may your dealer can offer you one of the following: include minimum age requirements.00 per day supported by receipts. Shuttle Service credit card. if you are unable to wait Chevrolet helps This requires that you sign and complete a rental minimize your inconvenience by providing several agreement and meet state. Additional Program Information reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum) Courtesy Transportation is available during the may be available for the use of public transportation Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period. Depending on the circumstances. vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information. 8-9 .

may not be available at every dealer. such as shuttle service. Department of Transportation Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet Washington. However. 20590 that contains detailed warranty information.Courtesy Transportation is available only at REPORTING SAFETY participating dealers and all program options.C. alternative transportation may be available under the If NHTSA receives similar complaints. campaign. D.S. area) or write to: NHTSA. it may open an Courtesy Transportation Program. it may order a recall and remedy General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify.C. Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the you should immediately inform the National Highway Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA). and if it finds that a safety defect exists in dealer for details. could cause a crash or could cause injury or death. Please consult your investigation. D. your dealer or time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility General Motors. DEFECTS TO THE UNITED Please contact your dealer for specific information about STATES GOVERNMENT availability. 8-10 . All Courtesy Transportation arrangements If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel. pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein To contact NHTSA. a group of vehicles. in addition to Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty. U. Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Warranty Information Washington. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline. notifying General Motors. you may either call the Auto Safety at its sole discretion. NHTSA cannot become involved change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any in individual problems between you.

Ontario L1H 8P7 8-11 . Ontario K1A 0N5 In Canada. You may write to: Chevrolet Motor Division Transport Canada Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center 330 Sparks Street P. write: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre. or write: Motors of Canada Limited.O. we certainly hope you’ll notify us. MI 48232-5170 Ottawa.REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT GENERAL MOTORS If you live in Canada. Transport Canada. 163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa. please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). in addition to notifying General Please call us at 1-800-222-1020. you should immediately notify in a situation like this. and you believe that your vehicle In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) has a safety defect. Or. Box 33170 Tower C Detroit.

incurring obligation. funds. Incorporated S P. steering. Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U. Owner’s Manual and Warranty Booklet. Unit Repair Manual RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35. Transmission. Transaxle. suspension. Box 07130 S Detroit. needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars please specify year and model name of the vehicle. Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.com For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA-MasterCard-Discover) Helm. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25. Transfer Case In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio.00 Current and Past Model Order Forms Service Bulletins Service Publications are available for current and Service Bulletins give technical service information past model GM vehicles. funds.S. body. axle.00 This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures. SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION Service Manuals Owner’s Information Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair Owner publications are written specifically for owners information on engines. Inc. adjustments and specifications Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only. MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U. and trucks. 8-12 . To request an order form. about the vehicle.S. for GM transmissions. and intended to provide basic operational information brakes. transaxles and transfer cases. on the World Wide Web at: www. etc.00 RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.helminc. transmission. electrical.O.00 Maintenance Schedule for all models. Allow ample time for delivery. ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123 – Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time Visit Helm.